260151866-GBSS16-0-Basic-Feature-Description.pdf

GBSS16.0

Basic Feature Description

Issue

04

Date

2015-03-04

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2015. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:

Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

[email protected]

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

GBSS16.0 Basic Feature Description

Contents

Contents 1 Basic Features..............................................................................1 1.1 System Improvement......................................................................................................................................................1 1.1.1 GBFD-110000 GBSS9.0 System Improvement..........................................................................................................1 1.1.2 GBFD-110001 GBSS12.0 System Improvement........................................................................................................2 1.1.3 GBFD-110030 3GPP Protocol Compliance................................................................................................................4 1.1.4 GBFD-110002 GBSS13.0 System Improvement........................................................................................................5 1.1.5 GBFD-110003 GBSS14.0 System Improvement........................................................................................................7 1.1.6 GBFD-110004 GBSS15.0 System Improvement........................................................................................................8 1.1.7 GBFD-110006 GBSS16.0 System Improvement......................................................................................................10 1.2 Radio Service Function................................................................................................................................................12 1.2.1 GBFD-110101 Frequency Band................................................................................................................................12 1.2.2 GBFD-114401 Multi-band Sharing One BSC...........................................................................................................14 1.2.3 GBFD-114901 Support for E-GSM and R-GSM Frequency Band...........................................................................15 1.2.4 GBFD-110201 Telephone Service (TS11).................................................................................................................17 1.2.5 GBFD-110202 Emergency Call Service (TS12).......................................................................................................18 1.2.6 GBFD-110203 Point To Point Short Message Service (TS21, TS22).......................................................................19 1.2.7 GBFD-110204 G3 Fax (TS61, TS62).......................................................................................................................20 1.2.8 GBFD-110205 Bearer Service (CSD).......................................................................................................................22 1.2.9 GBFD-114101 GPRS................................................................................................................................................23 1.3 Mobility Management..................................................................................................................................................25 1.3.1 GBFD-110301 Location Updating............................................................................................................................25 1.3.2 GBFD-110302 IMSI Detach.....................................................................................................................................27 1.3.3 GBFD-110303 CS Paging.........................................................................................................................................28 1.3.4 GBFD-110304 Authentication...................................................................................................................................31 1.3.5 GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover.......................................................................................................................32 1.3.6 GBFD-110607 Direct Retry......................................................................................................................................35 1.3.7 GBFD-110608 SDCCH Handover............................................................................................................................37 1.3.8 GBFD-110401 Basic Cell Selection..........................................................................................................................38 1.3.9 GBFD-110402 Basic Cell Re-selection.....................................................................................................................40 1.4 Connection Management..............................................................................................................................................41 1.4.1 GBFD-110501 Call Control......................................................................................................................................41 1.4.2 GBFD-110502 Assignment and Immediate Assignment...........................................................................................42 Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


ii


Contents

1.4.3 GBFD-110503 Call Reestablishment........................................................................................................................45 1.4.4 GBFD-112501 TCH Re-assignment..........................................................................................................................46 1.4.5 GBFD-119202 Packet Assignment Taken Over by the BTS.....................................................................................47 1.5 Radio Resource Management.......................................................................................................................................49 1.5.1 GBFD-111001 TRX Management.............................................................................................................................49 1.5.2 GBFD-111002 Radio Link Management..................................................................................................................50 1.5.3 GBFD-111003 Radio Common Channel Management.............................................................................................52 1.5.4 GBFD-111004 Radio Dedicated Channel Management...........................................................................................54 1.5.5 GBFD-111005 Enhanced Channel Assignment Algorithm.......................................................................................56 1.6 Operation and Maintenance..........................................................................................................................................58 1.6.1 MRFD-210301 Configuration Management.............................................................................................................58 1.6.2 MRFD-210302 Performance Management...............................................................................................................60 1.6.3 MRFD-210303 Inventory Management....................................................................................................................63 1.6.4 MRFD-210304 Faulty Management.........................................................................................................................66 1.6.5 MRFD-210305 Security Management......................................................................................................................70 1.6.6 MRFD-210309 DBS Topology Maintenance............................................................................................................71 1.6.7 MRFD-210310 BTS/NodeB Software USB Download............................................................................................73 1.6.8 GBFD-111202 O&M of BTS....................................................................................................................................75 1.6.9 GBFD-111203 O&M of BSC....................................................................................................................................77 1.6.10 GBFD-111207 BTS Test Function..........................................................................................................................79 1.6.11 GBFD-111210 Integrated Network Management Interface....................................................................................82 1.6.12 GBFD-116501 Man Machine Language (MML)....................................................................................................83 1.6.13 GBFD-116402 Maintenance Mode Alarm..............................................................................................................85 1.6.14 GBFD-113523 NAT Beside OM.............................................................................................................................86 1.7 Software Management..................................................................................................................................................87 1.7.1 MRFD-210401 BSC/RNC Software Management...................................................................................................87 1.7.2 MRFD-210402 BTS/NodeB Software Management................................................................................................89 1.7.3 GBFD-111213 Remote Upgrade of the BSC&BTS Software...................................................................................91 1.7.4 MRFD-210403 License Management.......................................................................................................................92 1.8 GBSS Network Architecture........................................................................................................................................94 1.8.1 GBFD-114601 Multi-Cell Function..........................................................................................................................94 1.8.2 GBFD-111501 BTS Combined Cabinet....................................................................................................................95 1.8.3 GBFD-111502 BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group..............................................................................................................97 1.8.4 GBFD-118801 BSC Cabinet/Subrack Sharing..........................................................................................................98 1.8.5 MRFD-210204 Star Topology.................................................................................................................................100 1.8.6 MRFD-210205 Chain Topology..............................................................................................................................101 1.8.7 MRFD-210206 Tree Topology................................................................................................................................102 1.8.8 GBFD-118621 Connection Inter BSC over IP........................................................................................................103 1.9 System Reliability......................................................................................................................................................104 1.9.1 GBFD-111701 Board Switchover...........................................................................................................................104 1.9.2 GBFD-111705 GSM Flow Control.........................................................................................................................105 1.9.3 GBFD-112301 Remote EAC Maintenance.............................................................................................................107 Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


iii


Contents

1.9.4 GBFD-111214 Operation & Maintenance System One-Key Recovery..................................................................108 1.9.5 GBFD-111211 Reporting the Temperature List of the BTS Equipment Room......................................................109 1.9.6 MRFD-210101 System Redundancy.......................................................................................................................111 1.9.7 MRFD-210102 Operate System Security Management..........................................................................................112 1.9.8 MRFD-210103 Link Aggregation...........................................................................................................................114 1.9.9 MRFD-210104 BSC/RNC Resource Sharing.........................................................................................................115 1.9.10 GBFD-117804 Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure.......................................................................117 1.9.11 GBFD-511003 Call-Based Flow Control..............................................................................................................118 1.9.12 GBFD-113801 TRX Cooperation..........................................................................................................................119 1.10 Basic features............................................................................................................................................................121 1.10.1 GBFD-110901 Adjustment of Adaptive Timing Advance....................................................................................121 1.10.2 GBFD-110801 Processing of Measurement Report..............................................................................................122 1.10.3 GBFD-110802 Pre-processing of Measurement Report.......................................................................................124 1.10.4 GBFD-111101 System Information Sending.........................................................................................................125 1.10.5 GBFD-111102 Forced System Information Sending by OMC.............................................................................127 1.10.6 GBFD-111901 Supporting Three-Digit MNC.......................................................................................................128 1.10.7 GBFD-116101 Support of Daylight Saving Time.................................................................................................129 1.10.8 GBFD-113001 SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment......................................................................................................130 1.10.9 GBFD-112401 Cell Frequency Scan.....................................................................................................................132 1.10.10 GBFD-111806 STP (Signaling Transport Point).................................................................................................133 1.10.11 GBFD-111802 14-Digit Signaling Point Code....................................................................................................134 1.10.12 MRFD-210801 Interface Message Tracing.........................................................................................................136 1.10.13 MRFD-210802 User Signaling Tracing..............................................................................................................137 1.10.14 GBFD-112203 Cell Tracing................................................................................................................................139 1.10.15 GBFD-111301 LAPD Multiplexing at Abis Interface.........................................................................................140 1.10.16 GBFD-114802 Discontinuous Reception (DRX)................................................................................................142 1.10.17 GBFD-111601 BTS Power Management............................................................................................................143 1.10.18 GBFD-110703 Enhanced Power Control Algorithm...........................................................................................144 1.10.19 GBFD-113525 DTMF Downlink Message Filter...............................................................................................147 1.10.20 GBFD-115201 High Speed Signaling.................................................................................................................148 1.10.21 GBFD-110521 Guaranteed Emergency Call.......................................................................................................149 1.10.22 GBFD-511001 License Control for Urgency......................................................................................................150 1.10.23 GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm.....................................................................................152 1.10.24 GBFD-113301 Enhanced Full Rate.....................................................................................................................153 1.10.25 GBFD-115601 Automatic Level Control (ALC).................................................................................................155 1.10.26 GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation(AEC).............................................................................................157 1.10.27 GBFD-115603 Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR)..............................................................................................158 1.10.28 GBFD-115702 TrFO............................................................................................................................................160 1.10.29 GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC).....................................................................................162 1.10.30 GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC).......................................................................163 1.10.31 GBFD-118103 Network Support SAIC..............................................................................................................165 1.10.32 GBFD-114801 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink..........................................................................166 Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


iv


Contents

1.10.33 GBFD-114803 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink..............................................................................167 1.10.34 GBFD-111604 Intelligent Combiner Bypass......................................................................................................169 1.10.35 GBFD-510604 PICO USB Encryption...............................................................................................................170 1.10.36 GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell...........................................................................................................................172 1.10.37 GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover................................................................................................................174 1.10.38 GBFD-117101 BTS Power Lift for Handover....................................................................................................175 1.10.39 GBFD-113501 A5/1 and A5/2 Ciphering Algorithm..........................................................................................176 1.10.40 GBFD-115505 AMR Radio Link Timer..............................................................................................................177 1.10.41 GBFD-113522 Encrypted Network Management...............................................................................................179 1.11 Interface Features.....................................................................................................................................................181 1.11.1 GBFD-111801 Ater Interface 4:1 Multiplexing....................................................................................................181 1.11.2 GBFD-119001 Gb Interface Function...................................................................................................................183 1.11.3 GBFD-111803 A Interface Circuit Management...................................................................................................184 1.11.4 GBFD-111804 A Interface Protocol Process.........................................................................................................186 1.11.5 GBFD-111805 A Interface Occupation Rate Monitoring......................................................................................187 1.11.6 GBFD-113904 Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface......................................................................................189 1.11.7 GBFD-116901 Flex Ater.......................................................................................................................................190 1.12 PS Services Features.................................................................................................................................................192 1.12.1 GBFD-119101 Packet Channel Combination Type..............................................................................................192 1.12.2 GBFD-119102 Packet System Information...........................................................................................................194 1.12.3 GBFD-119103 MS Types......................................................................................................................................195 1.12.4 GBFD-119104 MAC Mode...................................................................................................................................197 1.12.5 GBFD-119105 RLC Mode....................................................................................................................................198 1.12.6 GBFD-119106 Coding Scheme.............................................................................................................................199 1.12.7 GBFD-119107 Networking Control Mode............................................................................................................200 1.12.8 GBFD-119108 Network Operation Mode Support...............................................................................................202 1.12.9 GBFD-119109 QoS (Best Effort)..........................................................................................................................204 1.12.10 GBFD-119110 Access.........................................................................................................................................205 1.12.11 GBFD-119111 Assignment..................................................................................................................................206 1.12.12 GBFD-119112 PS Paging....................................................................................................................................208 1.12.13 GBFD-119113 Timing Advance Update.............................................................................................................209 1.12.14 GBFD-119115 Power Control.............................................................................................................................210 1.12.15 GBFD-119116 Packet Uplink Flow Control.......................................................................................................212 1.12.16 GBFD-119117 Flow Control on Gb Interface.....................................................................................................213 1.12.17 GBFD-113101 PDCH Dynamic Adjustment......................................................................................................215 1.12.18 GBFD-119205 Dynamically Adjusting the RRBP Frequency............................................................................217 1.12.19 GBFD-119303 Load Sharing...............................................................................................................................218 1.12.20 GBFD-119501 Adaptive Adjustment of Uplink and Downlink Channels..........................................................220 1.12.21 GBFD-119203 Extended Uplink TBF.................................................................................................................221 1.13 Antenna System Solution.........................................................................................................................................223 1.13.1 MRFD-210601 Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier)...................................................................223 1.13.2 MRFD-210602 Remote Electrical Tilt..................................................................................................................225 Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


v


Contents

1.13.3 MRFD-210604 2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity...............................................................................................228 1.14 Synchronization Mechanism....................................................................................................................................229 1.14.1 MRFD-210501 BTS/NodeB Clock.......................................................................................................................229 1.14.2 MRFD-210502 BSC/RNC Clock..........................................................................................................................231 1.14.3 GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization...........................................................................................................233 1.14.4 GBFD-118606 Clock Over IP...............................................................................................................................234 1.15 Maintainability and Testing......................................................................................................................................236 1.15.1 GBFD-119301 Voice Fault Diagnosis...................................................................................................................236 1.15.2 GBFD-119306 Abis Crossed Pair Diagnosis.........................................................................................................238 1.15.3 GBFD-119307 Spectrum Scan..............................................................................................................................239 1.15.4 GBFD-119308 Intermodulation Testing................................................................................................................240 1.15.5 GBFD-118607 IP Performance Monitor...............................................................................................................241 1.15.6 GBFD-118614 GSM PS Service Map...................................................................................................................243 1.15.7 GBFD-115402 LCS (Cell ID + TA)......................................................................................................................245 1.15.8 GBFD-118630 Ethernet OAM..............................................................................................................................246 1.15.9 GBFD-116401 End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing...............................................................................................248 1.16 Documentation.........................................................................................................................................................249 1.16.1 MRFD-210701 Documentation.............................................................................................................................249

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


vi


Figures

Figures Figure 1-1 UMTS NodeB topology......................................................................................................................72 Figure 1-2 GSM BTS topology.............................................................................................................................72 Figure 1-3 Networking for Link Aggregation.....................................................................................................115 Figure 1-4 Working principle of the RET antenna..............................................................................................226 Figure 1-5 IP PM procedure................................................................................................................................242

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


vii


1 Basic Features

1

Basic Features

1.1 System Improvement 1.1.1 GBFD-110000 GBSS9.0 System Improvement Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS9.0.

Summary The GBSS9.0 complies with 3GPP R6. When using new signaling processing boards and interface boards, the GBSC supports a maximum of 3072 TRXs and the evolution from the GSM network to the UMTS network.

Benefits A large-capacity BSC is provided for this feature. Therefore, the floor area, operation and maintenance (O&M) cost, power consumption, capital expenditure (CAPEX), and operating expense (OPEX) are reduced. The MBSC can be enabled with this feature. This facilitates the evolution from GSM to UMTS.

Description The GBSS9.0 complies with 3GPP R6 and provides the following enhancements: 1.

The BSC supports a maximum of 3072 TRXs.

2.

The signaling processing board XPUb and interface boards POUc, GOUc, and FG2c are introduced to improve the board processing capability.

3.

This feature supports the MBSC. The network can therefore be configured as GSM only, UMTS only, or GSM&UMTS. This facilitates a smooth evolution from GSM to GSM&UMTS and then to UMTS.

4.

In MBSC mode, O&M, radio resources management, IP transmission, and hardware resources can be shared between the BSC and the RNC.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


1


1 Basic Features

5.

GBSS9.0 supports EDGE+ evolution, including the Uplink EGPRS2-A, Downlink EGPRS2-A, MSRD, Dual Carriers in Downlink, and Latency Reduction features.

6.

GBSS9.0 supports IP enhancement, including the A IP over E1/T1, Abis IP over E1/T1, UDP MUX for A Transmission, A over IP, and 3GPP Protocol Compliance features.

7.

GBSS9.0 supports voice quality improvement, including the AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band), Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC), and Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC) features.

8.

GBSS9.0 supports EGPRS service enhancement, including the Conversational QoS, PS Handover, and Early TBF Establishment features.

9.

GBSS9.0 supports the Dynamic Cell Power Off feature for energy saving.

10. GBSS9.0 supports the Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure feature for improving the system reliability.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware The following single processing board is new: XPUb The following interface boards are new: POUc FG2c GOUc



BSC6910 Hardware NA



GBTS(GTMU) Hardware Support



GBTS(UMPT) Hardware Support



MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA



Prerequisite Features NA



Mutually Exclusive Features NA

1.1.2 GBFD-110001 GBSS12.0 System Improvement Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS12.0.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


2


1 Basic Features

Summary This feature provides the following enhancements in GBSS12.0: 

Increases the BSC capacity.



Enables the BSC support more network topologies.



Improves the reliability of the network topologies.



Enhances maintainability and testability.



Increases the system capacity in GBSS12.0, and less equipment can be used to provide the same capacity as before. Therefore, the required floor area in the equipment room and the power consumed by each TRX decrease.



Enables the GBSS12.0 support more network topologies to meet the development of allIP network.



Improves the reliability of the network topologies in GBSS12.0. In this way, the reliability of the GBSS system is improved in the case of sudden traffic burst.



Improves the O&M efficiency in GBSS12.0.

Benefits

Description The GBSS12.0 System Improvement feature is described as follows: 1. The BSC capacity is increased. In full configuration, the BSC supports a maximum of 4096 TRXs and a traffic volume of 24,000 Erlang. 2. The BSC supports more network topologies. The A interface supports TDM/IP dual stack and supports the gradual evolution from A over TDM to A over IP. 3. The reliability of the network topologies is improved. Various flow control measures are taken to improve the reliability of the GBSS system in the case of sudden traffic burst. 4. The maintainability and testability are enhanced. GBSS12.0 provides measures to detect faults in PS and CS services. In this way, problems on the existing network can be quickly identified and located, improving the network quality.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA



Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

GBTS(GTMU) Hardware Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3


1 Basic Features

Support 




MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.1.3 GBFD-110030 3GPP Protocol Compliance Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary Huawei GBSS equipment complies with the 3GPP specifications.

Benefits In compliance with 3GPP R6, this feature enables the BSC interwork with other network elements (NEs) that comply with 3GPP R99, R4, R5, or R6. With this feature, the BSC improves the competitiveness of operators and can provide diverse services with optimal performance for subscribers.

Description GBSS6.1 complies with 3GPP R99 and R4.

Enhancement 

GBSS7.0 Complies with 3GPP R99 and R4.









GBSS9.0 Complies with 3GPP R99, R4, R5, and R6.



GBSS12.0 Complies with 3GPP R99, R4, R5, and R6.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


4




1 Basic Features

GBSS13.0 Complies with 3GPP R99, R4, R5, R6, and R8.



GBSS14.0 Complies with 3GPP R99, R4, R5, R6, R8, and R9.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA



GBTS(GTMU) Hardware NA



GBTS(UMPT) Hardware NA



MS If new features defined in 3GPP R6 are required, MSs must comply with 3GPP R6.



CN If new features defined in 3GPP R6 are required, the CN must comply with 3GPP R6.



Other NEs If new features defined in 3GPP R6 are required, the interfaces on the related NEs must comply with 3GPP R6.









Use of a new TC board (DPUf) and enhanced system integration



Support for VAMOS



Improved voice quality and support for the E-coder, EPLC, and EVAD



Support for identifying instance messaging services



Improved transmission efficiency and support for Abis IPHC (IP header compression) and Abis PPP multiplexing.



Enhanced maintainability and testability

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


5


1 Basic Features

Benefits 

A BSC cabinet supports a maximum of 4096 TRXs. This reduces the floor area in the equipment room and the power consumption per TRX.



The provided VAMOS solution improves the spectral efficiency and network capacity.



The voice quality improvement enhances customer satisfaction.



Identifying instance messaging services improves the radio resource usage and increases operators' data services income.



The Abis transmission solution enhances the transmission efficiency.



The enhanced maintainability and testability improve O&M efficiency and network security.

Description The GBSS13.0 System Improvement feature is described as follows: 1. The integration of the BSC system is enhanced. A new TC board DPUf is introduced. In full configuration, a BSC cabinet supports a maximum of 4096 TRXs and a traffic volume of 24,000 Erlang. 2. The spectral efficiency and system capacity are increased. With the increasing number of radio CS subscribers and the implementation of 900 MHz refarming in some countries, the GSM spectral resources may be limited. The VAMOS solution supported by GBSS13.0 improves spectral efficiency, relieving the limitation on system capacity. 3. The voice quality is enhanced. With the E-coder function, the voice coding and decoding algorithms of EFR and AMR users are optimized to improve user experience and increase the MOS. In addition, the improved VAD technology is used to enhance the identification of ring back tone and music. As a result, more than 99% of the music can be identified and the MOS for the ring back tone increases by more than 0.1 points. 4. The transmission efficiency is improved. Abis IPHC (IP header compression) is supported to improve the Abis transmission efficiency. 5. The testability and maintainability are improved. Operation and maintenance (O&M) and fault locating functions, such as the BTS IP transmission real-time monitoring, are provided to improve the O&M efficiency.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware A new TC board DPUf is added.



BSC6910 Hardware NA



Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


6


1 Basic Features

NA 




MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA









Increased system capacity



Decreased number of BTS migrations caused by internal GBSS problems



Improved load balancing capability on the GBSS control plane



Increases the system capacity, and uses fewer devices to provide the same capacity as before. Therefore, the required floor area in the equipment room and the power consumed by each TRX decrease.



Decreases the number of BTS migrations.



Balances loads on the control plane by fully utilizing the hardware on the control plane.

Benefits

Description The GBSS14.0 System Improvement feature provides the following improvements: 

The BSC capacity is increased. In all-IP transmission mode, a fully-configured BSC supports a maximum of 8192 TRXs and a maximum traffic volume of 45,000 Erlang.



The transmission resource management method is optimized on the MPU board. The BSC implements load balancing among different MPU boards based on the load and transmission resource on each MPU board. This reduces the number of BTS migrations caused by an imbalanced load among MPU boards.



Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

CPU loads of boards on the control plane are significantly balanced. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7


1 Basic Features

This fully utilizes the processing capability of the control plane. 

New boards are added. DPUe, FG2d, and GOUd boards are added to replace DPUg, FG2a, and GOUa boards, respectively.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware The DPUe, FG2d, and GOUd boards are added.



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.1.6 GBFD-110004 GBSS15.0 System Improvement Availability This feature is introduced in GBSS15.0.


Enhanced system integration with the introduction of the BSC6910



Expanded network capacity



Optimized BSC flow control mechanism



Improved system maintenance capability

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


8


1 Basic Features

Benefits This feature provides the following features: 

Improves the BSC integrity, and use fewer devices to provide the same capacity as before. Therefore, the required floor area in the equipment room and the power consumed by each TRX decrease.



Increases network capacity due to optimization of the transmission bandwidth and radio resource management in IP transmission mode.



Improves system reliability due to optimization of the flow control mechanism.



Increases the O&M efficiency of the GBSS system.

Description The GBSS15.0 System Improvement feature provides the following improvements: 

The integration of the BSC system is enhanced. The BSC6910 product model is introduced. In all-IP transmission mode where 10GE ports are used, a fully-configured BSC6910 supports a maximum of 24,000 TRXs, a maximum traffic volume of 150,000 Erlang, and a maximum bandwidth of 8000 Mbit/s.



Network capacity is increased. The IP QOS feature is enhanced to implement the adaptive adjustment of Abis interface bandwidth and access control optimization. This increases the bandwidth usage efficiency and allows more subscribers to access the network. To increase the radio resource usage efficiency, the efficiency in which PDCHs carry TBFs, and the number of admitted PS subscribers, the following optional features are introduced in GBSS15.0: PS Access Congestion Balancing Small Packet Load Balancing Duty-Cycle-based PDCH Management



The flow control mechanism is optimized on the BSC. With the optimized flow control mechanism, the GBSS15.0 implements the following functions: DSP self-healing processing A interface robustness protection Signaling delay-based flow control These functions improve system reliability during peak hours.



The GBSS system maintenance capability is improved. The maintenance and testability of multi-site cells are improved and PS counter measurement is optimized. In addition, the following enhancements are provided: Enhanced maintainability and testability KPI monitoring Isolated problem location Network parameter optimization

Enhancement None Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


9


1 Basic Features

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware The OIUb, EIUb, PEUc, and SPUb boards are added



BSC6910 Hardware The EOMUa, EGPUa, EXPUa, ENIUa, ESAUa, and EXOUa are added.









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.1.7 GBFD-110006 GBSS16.0 System Improvement Availability This feature is introduced in GBSS16.0.

Summary The GBSS16.0 System Improvement feature provides the following system capability enhancements: 

BTS supporting new hardware



BSC6910 supporting the A over TDM mode



GSM network capacity expansion



GSM network quality improvement



GSM/LTE interoperation user experience improvement



GSM network sharing enhancement



GSM O&M experience improvement

Benefits This feature provides the following benefits: 

Facilitates the GSM-to-SingleRAN evolution and reduces the SingleRAN networking cost.



Allows the use of the large-capacity BSC6910 in A over TDM mode.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


10


1 Basic Features



Expands GSM network capacity and improves GSM network quality to provide better solutions for GSM/LTE refarming or tight frequency reuse scenarios.



Guarantees the quality of service (QoS) of LTE CSFB calls and improves the access performance and call quality of LTE CSFB users.



Supports network sharing-related contents in 3GPP Release 10 and supports the MOCN solution based on interconnection to MSCs from different vendors.



Improves O&M efficiency during the networking change from Abis over TDM to Abis over IP.

Description This feature provides the following enhancements in GBSS16.0: 

BTS supporting new hardware Supports UBBP boards, which can provide baseband processing services for multiple modes in addition to the GSM mode.



BSC6910 supporting the A over TDM mode Introduces DPUf boards supporting the A over TDM mode to the BSC6910, and supports features related to the A over TDM mode, such as EVAD, TFO, and AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment.



GSM network capacity expansion Introduces the features VAMOS FR, VAMOS I&II Support, and IBCA II, and enhances the features VAMOS, Mute SAIC MS Identification, and VAMOS Call Drop Solution.



GSM network quality improvement Introduces the feature MICC, which can significantly improve uplink anti-interference performance, and enhances the feature Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing, which supports Um-interface speech frame repairing in AMR FR 5.9 kbit/s and AMR HR 5.9 kbit/s coding schemes.



GSM/LTE interoperation user experience improvement Introduces the feature CSFB QoS, which supports the following functions: Very early TCH assignment for CSFB calls Preferential allocation of TCHFs Preempting channels occupied by non-CSFB calls during channel congestion Prohibiting CSFB calls to perform VAMOS channel multiplexing Enhances the feature CSFB, which helps quickly identify the CSFB mobile-originated calls (MOCs) and mobile-terminated calls (MTCs) and optimize the procedure of reporting Utran Classmark Change messages for CSFB calls.



GSM network sharing enhancement Introduces the feature MOCN II, which supports the basic MOCN procedure defined in 3GPP 23.251 Release 10. In the MOCN procedure, users of different operators are routed to corresponding CNs.



GSM O&M experience improvement

Supports configuring transmission data, adjusting and testing the transmission status, and querying the port status for Abis IP over ETH in Abis over TDM mode.



11


1 Basic Features

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware The A over TDM networking mode requires the DPUf board.



GBTS(GTMU) Hardware The baseband extension mode requires the UBBP board.



GBTS(UMPT) Hardware The baseband extension mode requires the UBBP board.



MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.2 Radio Service Function 1.2.1 GBFD-110101 Frequency Band Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary Huawei GBSS equipment supports the following frequency bands: 

GSM850



GSM900



DCS1800



PCS1900

Benefits With this feature, the BTS supports multiple frequency bands and therefore TRX boards of different frequency bands can be inserted into the same cabinet. Therefore, the number of required cabinets and the floor area required for the equipment room are reduced. GBSS equipment supports multiple frequency bands. Therefore, the GSM network can be deployed with different frequency bands to meet the requirements of operators. Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


12


1 Basic Features

Description The following table lists the frequency bands supported by Huawei GBSS equipment. Frequency Band

Uplink Frequency (MS TX, BTS RX)

Downlink Frequency (BTS TX, MS RX)

ARFCN

850 MHz

824-C849MHz

869-C894MHz

128-C251

900 MHz

890-C915 MHz

935-C960 MHz

1-C124

1800 MHz

1710-C1785 MHz

1805-C1880 MHz

512-C885

1900 MHz

1850-C1910 MHz

1930-C1990 MHz

512-C810

(P-GSM)

The GSM900 frequency band contains the standard P-GSM and extended E-GSM and RGSM. The GSM900 listed in the preceding table refers to P-GSM. For details about E-GSM and R-GSM, see the description about optional feature GBFD-114901 Support for E-GSM and R-GSM Frequency Band in GBSS15.0 Optional Feature Description.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA



GBTS(GTMU) Hardware Support For more information, see the product description documentation of the corresponding RF module.



GBTS(UMPT) Hardware Support For more information, see the product description documentation of the corresponding RF module.



MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


13


1 Basic Features

1.2.2 GBFD-114401 Multi-band Sharing One BSC Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary This feature enables operators to deploy a multi-band network, that is, one BSC can support multiple frequency bands. Additionally, this feature enables operators to expand frequency bands to alleviate the problem of insufficient frequency resources.

Benefits This feature enables a network to support multiple frequency bands and enables operators to expand frequency bands.

Description Huawei GBSS supports GSM900, DCS1800, PCS1900, and GSM850 and therefore supports a multi-band network sharing one BSC. The DCS1800 and PCS1900, however, have the following restrictions: 

A DCS1800 cell and PCS1900 cell cannot be configured as neighboring cell for each other.



One cell's neighboring cell cannot have a DCS1800 cell and PCS1900 cell at the same time.

Huawei GBSS supports the following types of multi-band networks: 

GSM850 + GSM900 + DCS1800



GSM850 + GSM900 + PCS1900

In a multi-band network, parameters associated with cell selection and handover can be set based on the specific frequency band so that the cell selection, cell reselection, and handover between different bands can be implemented. The dual-band network is a common multi-band network and consists of following types: 

GSM900 + DCS1800



GSM850 + PCS1900

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA



Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


14


1 Basic Features

NA 




MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.2.3 GBFD-114901 Support for E-GSM and R-GSM Frequency Band Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary Huawei GBSS equipment supports the E-GSM900 and R-GSM900 frequency bands.


This feature enables services to be processed on the extended frequency bands and extends the frequency range.



The state radio regulatory commission of each country is responsible for the division and selling of the frequency resources of the country. The GSM900 is the commonly used frequency band. To fully utilize frequency resources, the P-GSM900 frequency band is extended to bring more benefits to governments and operators.

In this way, the related government organizations can make profits by selling this frequency band. In addition, the operators obtain more radio resources and make more profits by providing better services to end users.

Description The operating frequency of E-GSM (including the standard GSM900) is as follows: 

Uplink: 880-C915 MHz



Downlink: 925-C960 MHz



ARFCN: 0-C124, 975-C1023

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


15


1 Basic Features

The operating frequency of R-GSM (dedicated to the railway communications) is as follows: 

Uplink: 876-C915 MHz



Downlink: 921-C960 MHz



ARFCN: 0-C124, 955-C1023

The E-GSM900, R-GSM900, and P-GSM900 belong to the same frequency band while their frequencies are not adjacent. Therefore, the extended frequency bands of E-GSM and R-GSM are introduced. The E-GSM extended frequency band refers to the E-GSM frequency band excluding the P-GSM frequency band. The R-GSM extended frequency band refers to the RGSM frequency band excluding the E-GSM frequency band. For the cells configured with E-GSM extended frequency band or R-GSM frequency band, the system adopts different channel assignment strategies according to the frequency band supporting capability of the MS and the channel. During the immediate assignment, the system assigns a channel to the MS based on the frequency band supported by the BCCH carrier. When assigning a channel, the system obtains the classmark of the MS and then determines whether a channel is supported by the MS. Among all the channels supported by the MS, the system preferentially assigns a channel that is not in the intersection of the frequency bands to the MS. For example, if an MS supports the E-GSM band, and the available channels are carried on the P-GSM band and the E-GSM extended band, the system preferentially assigns the channel on the E-GSM extended band to the MS. The band intersection, that is, P-GSM band, is reserved for other MSs with weak multiband capability.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA



GBTS(GTMU) Hardware Support For more information, see the product description documentation of the corresponding RF module.



GBTS(UMPT) Hardware Support For more information, see the product description documentation of the corresponding RF module.



MS The MS must support this feature.



CN NA



Other NEs NA







Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


16


1 Basic Features

1.2.4 GBFD-110201 Telephone Service (TS11) Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary Huawei GBSS supports the telephone service (TS11) specified in GSM specifications. The telephone service can be classified into mobile-originated calls (MOC) and mobileterminated calls (MTC). The full rate (FR) speech coding is adopted by default. The speech calls can be made between MSs within a GSM PLMN or between a PLMN MS and a public switched telephone network (PSTN) MS or other communication networks.

Benefits Telephone service is one of the basic speech service functions provided by operators. The excellent speech service provided by Huawei BSS provides the following benefits: 

Telephone services with high quality, improving user experience for operators



Better brand reputation, increasing the operators' profit

Description Telephone service (TS11) specified in GSM specifications is a basic function of the GSM equipment, such as Huawei GBSS. The telephone service is classified into MOCs and MTCs. The telephone service supports the speech calls between MSs within a GSM PLMN, also between a PLMN MS and a PSTN MS subscriber or other communication networks. In the BSS, the transcoder&rate adaptation unit (TRAU) is responsible for the speech conversion between the GSM speech coding and the 64 kbit/s PCM coding. If the speech coding schemes specified in optional features are not activated for a common call, the full rate speech coding is adopted by default.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

MS Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17


1 Basic Features

NA 

CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.2.5 GBFD-110202 Emergency Call Service (TS12) Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary Huawei GBSS supports the emergency call service (TS12) specified in GSM specifications and provides a high priority for the emergency call service.

Benefits Emergency call service enables a subscriber to make calls for assistance in case of emergency. For subscribers in emergencies, the emergency call service provides the following benefits: 

Subscribers can dial the specified emergency service number free of charge even if the MS is suspended or the subscriber is a defaulting subscriber.



The emergency call service takes precedence over other services in accessing the network. Even located in congested cells, the subscribers can contact the aid agencies by dialing the emergency service number.

Description Emergency call service (TS12) specified in GSM specifications is a basic function of the GSM equipment, such as Huawei GBSS. The emergency call takes precedence over common calls. Compared with the common call procedure, the emergency call procedure is simplified to accelerate the call establishment and to ensure a high call establishment success rate. For example, during the immediate assignment procedure, the BSC can directly assign a traffic channel (TCH) for an emergency call so that the call quickly and easily occupies radio resources.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


18




1 Basic Features

BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.2.6 GBFD-110203 Point To Point Short Message Service (TS21, TS22) Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary Huawei GBSS supports the TS21 and TS22 services specified in GSM specifications, that is, the sending and receiving of short messages.

Benefits The point-to-point short message service is widely used. As a value-added service, the short message service is a complement to the GSM mobile speech services. An MS can exchange information with other MSs by using the point-to-point short message services. This Point To Point Short Message Service feature provides the following benefits: 

Meeting subscribers' increasingly diversified data service requirements



Becoming an increasingly important source of operators' revenue and diversifying the operators' profit portfolio



Enriching the operation modes of the service providers (SPs).

Description Mobile-terminated (MT) point-to-point short message service (TS11) and mobile-originated (MO) point-to-point short message service (TS12) specified in GSM specifications are basic functions of the GSM equipment, such as Huawei GBSS.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


19


1 Basic Features

The point-to-point short message service can be used to exchange information in plain text. With this service, subscribers can exchange text information with each other and the operators can send service promotion information and promotional information. Both the short message center (SMC) and the MS can initiate the point-to-point short message service. The BSS supports the sending and receiving of short messages. On receiving the signaling of a short message from the MSC, the BSS forwards the short message to the MS. In turn, on receiving a short message from the MS, the BSS forwards the short message to the MSC. The short message here refers to the one that is transmitted through SS7 signaling. The short message service implemented in the PS domain is not included. The PS short message is a function mainly implemented by the SGSN and is treated as a common data service on the BSC side.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs This feature requires support from the SMS center.







1.2.7 GBFD-110204 G3 Fax (TS61, TS62) Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary Huawei GBSS supports the TS61 and TS62 services specified in GSM specifications. TS61 refers to the G3 alternate voice and fax service and TS62 refers to the G3 automatic voice and fax service. The TS61 and TS62 services enable an MS to send and receive faxes. Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


20


1 Basic Features

Benefits The G3 fax feature is a value-added mobile data service that allows MSs to send and receive voice faxes. This service is a complement to the GSM mobile speech service and enables MSs to carry out fax services. This feature provides the following benefits: 

Enables an MS to receive and send faxes any time anywhere and meeting diversified requirements from the subscribers.



Enables operators to provide mobile fax service to enrich their service scopes and revenue sources.

Description TS61 fax and TS62 fax services specified in GSM specifications are basic functions of the GSM equipment, such as Huawei GBSS. With the TS61 fax and TS62 fax services, an MS can send and receive voice faxes. The fax service is realized by using other upper-layer protocols. Therefore, the BSS provides the lower-layer connection but does not process the upper-layer services. The main device required by this feature is deployed in the CN.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


21


1 Basic Features

1.2.8 GBFD-110205 Bearer Service (CSD) Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary Huawei BSS supports the traditional CSD services and the data services with multiple rates.

Benefits Both CSD and GPRS are standard 2G data services. Data services are widely used. As a value-added mobile data service, CSD is a complement to the GSM mobile speech services. With the CSD service, an MS can connect to the operators' data network or even the Internet. This feature provides the following benefits: 

Meets subscribers' increasingly diversified data service requirements and enables data transfer between networks



Becomes an increasingly important source of operators' revenue and increases the operators' profit



Helps operators provide diversified services on the data platform of CSD to attract more subscribers and thereby achieve more profit.



Be implemented without adding the PCU device or hardware and software (This reduces the space required by the equipment room and facilitates the management of the equipment room. Moreover, the CSD increases the choices of data services.)

Description Huawei GBSS supports various bearer services specified in GSM specifications. The GBSS provides the lower-layer connection but does not process the upper-layer services. The bearer service can be used in low-rate data service applications. Huawei GBSS supports the following bearer services: 

BS21 asynchronous duplex circuit data service, transparent/nontransparent, 300 bit/s






BS23 asynchronous duplex circuit data service, transparent/nontransparent, 1200/75 bit/s (see remark 1)












BS31 synchronous duplex circuit data service, transparent/nontransparent, 1200 bit/s












BS41 PAD access service, asynchronous circuit, transparent/nontransparent, 300 bit/s




Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


22


1 Basic Features



BS43 PAD access service, asynchronous circuit, transparent/nontransparent, 1200/75 bit/s (see remark 1)












BS51 packet access service, 2.4 kbit/s, synchronous, UDI, nontransparent









BS61 alternate speech/data service, transparent/nontransparent



BS81 speech followed by data service

Remark 1: Bearer services BS23 and BS43 apply only to MOCs. In BS23 and BS43 services, the data rate of 75 bit/s applies to the uplink and the data rate of 1200 bit/s applies to the downlink.

Enhancement 

GBSS8.0 The GBFD-119405 14.4kbit/s Circuit Switched Data is introduced as an optional feature.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.2.9 GBFD-114101 GPRS Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1. Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


23


1 Basic Features

Summary The General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) is a type of end-to-end packet switched service based on the GSM technology.

Benefits By providing data services, the GPRS helps increase operators' revenue and the proportion of packet service (PS) in mobile services.

Description Huawei GPRS is implemented by adding GPRS support nodes (GSNs) and packet control units (PCU) on the GSM system and upgrading the software. In this manner, the GPRS provides quick access of PS services for mobile subscribers. There are two PCU types: builtin PCU and external PCU. A Huawei external PCU is connected to the BSC on the Pb interface. Huawei GPRS has an open system architecture, which facilitates smooth capacity expansion. The standardized interfaces ensure equipment compatibility, support QoS features, and support dynamic allocation of radio resources. In addition, the flexible networking and configuration save a large amount of CAPEX for operators at the initial phase of the GPRS service operation. In addition, Huawei GPRS provides abundant PS services, such as mobile Internet access, e-Commerce (e-Bank and e-Currency), trunking management, remote control or measurement, booking system (used by hotels, theaters, and airplanes), and group call services (such as releasing information). Huawei GPRS provides three functions: 



Managing radio links and resources: −

The radio link management includes link establishment, maintenance, and release.

−

The radio resource management includes encoding/decoding, configuration, and multiplexing of the radio packet channel and conversion between CS channels and PS channels.

Controlling MS access

By controlling the access of MSs, the GPRS prevents channel contention and allocates channels to MSs according to the requested QoS. 

Providing routes for packet data transmission

The GPRS system provides routes to transmit the packet data to the SGSN and receives the downlink data from the SGSN. According to GSM specifications, the GPRS can use four coding schemes: CS-1, CS-2, CS-3, and CS-4. The recommended CS-1 and CS-2 coding schemes ensure 100% and 90% cell coverage, respectively, and meet the co-channel interference requirement (CIR≥9 dB). However, they provide a data rate of only 9.05 kbit/s and 13.4 kbit/s (containing the RLC block head), respectively. The reason is that the half-rate and 1/3 rate bits in the RLC blocks are used for forward error correction (FEC). This reduces the CIR requirement and the transmission rate. To increase the transmission rate, Huawei provides CS-3 and CS-4 coding schemes. The CS-3 and CS-4 coding schemes provide the transmission rate of 15.6 kbit/s and 21.4 kbit/s (containing the RLC block head), respectively. In addition, they have higher CIR requirements. During data transmission, the BSC dynamically adjusts the channel encoding or decoding scheme according to the retransmission rate of RLC blocks on the uplink or Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


24


1 Basic Features

downlink temporary block flow (TBF). This improves the transmission rate while maintaining the data transmission quality, maximizing the radio resource usage. In addition Huawei GPRS supports dynamic conversion among CS-1, CS-2, CS-3, and CS-4.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware A PCU, a packet-service processing board, and a Gb interface board are required.



BSC6910 Hardware NA












CN The CN must support this feature.



Other NEs NA







1.3 Mobility Management 1.3.1 GBFD-110301 Location Updating Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary To ensure that services such as paging services can be processed properly, the network needs to know the location of an MS. The MS registers to the network by performing the location update procedure. In this way, the VLR and HLR keep track of the location information about the MS, ensuring the normal communication between MSs.

Benefits Location update is a basic feature for operators to provide the CS speech services. Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


25


1 Basic Features

Description The location update procedure is the signaling procedure for the MS to update the location information on the network. This ensures that the location information about the MS stored in the HLR and VLR is consistent with the actual location information about the MS. The general location update procedure is as follows: 1.

The MS initiates the access request with the location update as the access cause;

2.

The network side allocates a signaling channel to the MS;

3.

The MS sends a location update request on this signaling channel;

4.

The NSS side determines whether to accept the location update request based on the identity of the MS.

In different scenarios, three types of specific location update procedures are initiated: normal location updating, periodic location updating, and IMSI attach location updating. 

Normal location updating When the location of an MS changes, the MS initiates a normal location update procedure. During the normal location update procedure, the network side may initiate other supplementary procedures, such as the classmark interrogation, identification request, authentication, and ciphering mode setting.



Periodic location updating When timer T3212 expires, the MS initiates the periodic updating procedure. The value of T3212 is provided by the network in the system information type 3 message. The MS resolves this system information message to obtain the value of the T3212 timer.



IMIS attach location update procedure The IMSI attach location update is a complement to the IMSI detach procedure. The network uses the system information type 3 message to indicate whether the IMSI attach and IMSI detach are allowed. If the network indicates that the IMSI attach and IMSI detach are required, the MS triggers the IMSI attach procedure when the IMSI is activated. When the MS activates the IMSI or the MS has moved from a non-coverage area to a coverage area, the IMSI attach procedure is triggered if the IMSI attach is allowed and the stored location area of the MS is the same as the location area of the serving cell. Location update ensures smooth communication by updating the information about the location of MSs stored in the VLR and HLR in real time.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA






Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

GBTS(UMPT) Hardware Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

26


1 Basic Features

NA 

MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.3.2 GBFD-110302 IMSI Detach Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary After the IMSI of a subscriber is detached from the network, the MSC/VLR marks the subscriber as invalid and will no longer send any paging message to this subscriber.

Benefits IMSI detach is a basic feature for operators to provide the CS speech services.

Description IMSI attach and detach are IMSI-specific procedures. When an MS is powered off, it sends the MSC a message containing the detach request. After receiving this message, the MSC/VLR sets the subscriber status to invalid and will no longer page this subscriber. During the IMSI detach, the subscriber status is recorded only on the MSC/VLR but not on the HLR. After the MS is powered on again, the MS performs the IMSI attach procedure if the MS still resides in the location area where it resides before it is powered off. If the MS resides in a different location area, the MS performs the normal location update procedure to update the new location information in the HLR and VLR. The MSC informs the MS whether the IMSI attach or detach is allowed by sending the system information type 3 message.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

BSC6910 Hardware Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

27


1 Basic Features

NA 







MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.3.3 GBFD-110303 CS Paging Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary By performing the paging procedure, the network instructs the MS to access the network as the called party to complete the call establishment.

Benefits Paging is a basic feature for operators to provide the CS speech services. The paging algorithm determines the paging efficiency of the GBSS. Huawei GBSS paging algorithm provides the following benefits: 

Guarantees the paging processing capability while maintaining the paging efficiency and reducing the paging load. The paging processing capability is one of the KPIs that indicate the system capability.



Decreases the complaints and increases customer satisfaction by preventing paging losses and therefore increasing the call success rate.

Description The paging procedure is described as follows: To answer calls in a timely manner, the MS in idle state listens to the paging channel in real time. If there is a paging message to the MS, the MS responds to the paging and completes the subsequent procedure as a called party. Pagings are classified into PS pagings and CS pagings. To transmit downlink data to an MS, the SGSN initiates the PS paging procedure. If a packet common control channel (PCCCH) is Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


28


1 Basic Features

configured, the PS paging message is transmitted on the PCCCH. If no PCCCH is configured, the PS message is transmitted on the paging channel (PCH). The CS paging message is sent on the PCH. When a call arrives at the MSC that serves the MS, the MSC determines the location area of the MS and sends the paging message to all BSCs in this location area. The BSCs determine the paging cell based on the location area and determine the paging group to which the MS belongs based on the IMSI. Then, the BSC sends the paging message to the corresponding BTS. The BTS then sends the paging message to the MS over an assigned PCH. Huawei GBSS supports the three standard paging modes: 

Common paging mode The paging message is transmitted only over the configured PCH and the IMSI defined channel.



Complete paging mode When an MS group is informed to work in this mode, the paging message to any MS in this group can be transmitted over any PCH on the same timeslot. This avoids paging message loss when the PCH configuration is dynamically changed.



Spaced paging mode The BSS sends the paging message to a group over another paging channel to avoid temporary overload. That is, the MS that receives common paging messages over channel N can obtain the paging messages over the next paging channel (N+2). Huawei GBSS supports paging message queuing, paging retransmission, simultaneous processing of various pagings, and paging flow control. This can effectively improve the paging capacity of the BSC.



Paging message queuing The transmission of paging messages on the Um interface is limited on the basis of paging groups. The paging message of one paging group can only be transmitted on the paging block corresponding to the paging group. Therefore, the paging message queuing is implemented on the BTS. That is, during the period when the BTS waits for transmission, the paging messages from the BSC are buffered on the BTS. Upon the transmission, the BTS selects the appropriate paging messages from the queue to transmit on the corresponding block. If many paging messages have the same transmission priority, the BTS processes these messages according to the FIFO principle.



Paging retransmission Generally, both the CN and BSS of the GSM network allow paging retransmission. A two-level retransmission mechanism is provided. One retransmission is initiated by the CN to handle long intermittence during the paging transmission. The retransmission initiated by the CN takes a relatively long time. The other retransmission is implemented on the BTS. The retransmission initiated by the BTS takes a relatively short time. Hence, the two-level retransmission mechanism reduces the signaling load on the Abis interface and A interface. Huawei BSS supports the paging retransmission. That is, when there is no paging message or immediate assignment message to be transmitted on the corresponding sending block, the paging messages that are already transmitted are retransmitted on this sending block. The maximum number of paging retransmissions can be specified by the system parameter.



Simultaneous processing of multiple paging messages Each paging command from the BSC comprises only one paging message sent to one MS, but each paging request on the Um interface may pack a maximum of four paging messages sent to four different MSs. Therefore, to improve the efficiency of the paging processing, the number of paging commands to the MS included in the paging message

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


29


1 Basic Features

on the Um interface should be as many as that is specified. In detail, a maximum of four paging messages can be included. When the sending block of a paging group is polled, the BTS searches for the paging messages to be transmitted in the paging queue corresponding to the paging group. Then, based on the maximum combination principle, the BTS packs these paging messages or several of the paging messages as appropriate type of paging request on the Um interface. The paging request is then sent on the sending block to the MSs. In this way, the paging commands of multiple MSs can be transmitted on the Um interface. 

Paging flow control When the paging flow from the MSC exceeds the processing capability of the BSS, the BSS initiates the selective flow control based on the current network situation to ensure the robustness and proper operation of the system, the high efficiency of the paging capacity, and the smoothness and stability of services.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.3.4 GBFD-110304 Authentication Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


30


1 Basic Features

Summary Authentication is an identity verification procedure. With the authentication, only legal subscribers can access the network.

Benefits Authentication is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS speech services. This feature ensures that only the legal subscribers can access the network, thereby guaranteeing the security of the network and services.

Description Authentication is a procedure in which the GSM network verifies the validity of the identity of an MS. The purpose of authentication is to prevent unauthorized subscribers from accessing the network and to protect the private information of authorized subscribers. The network initiates the authentication procedure in the following situations: 

The MS requests to change the information restored in VLR or HLR.



Service access such as MOC, MTC, MS activation or deactivation, or supplementary services is required.



Initial network access is required after MSC/VLR reboot.



The ciphering key Kc sequence is mismatched.



The network needs to determine whether the MS is accessible to network.



Parameters for the MS to calculate new ciphering key is required.

The authentication procedure is always initiated and controlled by the network. After the RR connection between the MSC and the BSS is established, the network can decide whether to initiate the authentication procedure to verify the subscriber's identity. The BSS is mainly responsible for the RR connection establishment and the transparent transmission between the MSC and the MS. When the network determines to initiate the authentication procedure, the MSC/VLR sends the MS an Authentication Request message to trigger the authentication procedure. The MS responds to this request with an Authentication Response message and reports the calculated result to the CN for approval for the authentication. Authentication strengthens the network identification of subscribers and ensures their security.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA




Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


31




1 Basic Features




MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.3.5 GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary This feature involves the following phases: MR reporting, MR processing, handover decision, and handover execution. In the handover decision phase, an appropriate candidate cell is selected for the handover.

Benefits With this feature, the MSs in movement can continue with the ongoing call. Handover is an important method to ensure the voice quality. Handover optimizes the overall performance of the system by adjusting the traffic volume of the cells.

Description The GSM service area is composed of a number of cells that provide continuous coverage. The handover technique is introduced into the GSM system to enable the MSs in movement to continue with the ongoing calls within the coverage area, optimizing the network performance. This feature involves the following phases: MR reporting, MR processing, handover decision, and handover execution. The NEs involved in the handover include the MS, BSS, and MSC. The measurement and MR reporting are implemented by the MS and BTS. The MS measures the downlink level strength, downlink quality, and TA of the GSM cell and then reports the information to the BTS. The BTS measures the receive level strength and quality of the MS and then reports all the information to the BSC. Generally, the MR processing is implemented by the BSC. The BSC performs the basic functions such as filtering and interpolation to provide a reference for the subsequent handover decisions. If the BTS performs the preprocessing of MRs, the MR processing can be implemented by the BTS. Based on different factors such as radio signal quality, radio signal level, speed, load, and requirement of operators, the handover decision algorithm determines which candidate cell to be used as the Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


32


1 Basic Features

target cell for handover. After the target cell is selected, the handover procedure is initiated. If the handover failure or rollback occurs, the MR indicating the result is reported to the handover decision module. Then, the handover decision algorithm selects another candidate cell as the target cell. The handover decision algorithm is categorized into five types: high-speed railway fast handover, emergency handover, enhanced dual-band network handover, load handover, and normal handover. The emergency handover is of five types: TA handover, bad quality handover, quick level drop handover, interference handover, and no downlink measurement report handover. The normal handover is of the following types: edge handover, hierarchical handover, PBGT handover, concentric cell handover, AMR handover, and better 3G cell handover. High-speed railway fast handover: This handover reduces the filtering time, speeds up the handover and determines whether to trigger the handover based on the frequency offset and signal level. In addition, the neighboring cell on a chain is selected to improve the reliability. TA handover: The timing advance can be used as a standard to limit the cell coverage to some extent. The BSC determines whether the TA value of the current MS exceeds the timing advance limit (TALIM). If the TALIM is exceeded, the BSC initiates an emergency handover with the cause value being great TA value. The TA value ranges from 0 to 63. The step of each bit corresponds to the distance from the MS to the BTS, which is 553.5 m. The TA value 63 corresponds to a distance of 35 km. If the serving cell meets the conditions to trigger a TA emergency handover, penalty is performed on the originating cell after a successful to prevent a handover back to this cell due to other causes. The TA handover algorithm has been optimized to meet the special requirements of the extended cells. Quick level drop handover: This handover is responsive to the signals with rapid signal level drop. The average value filtering and P/N decision methods are used in edge handover and PBGT handover, and therefore the time for measurement and decision is prolonged. Therefore, these handovers are not sensitive to rapid level drop in a short period. Therefore, concerning the rapid level drop, you can perform finite impact response (FIR) filtering on the original receive level. This filtering method is responsive to the rapid level drop based on the drop slope of the original receive level. When the quick level drop handover is triggered, the selected target cell should have the highest priority based on the ranking in the preprocessing. If the candidate GSM cells do not meet the handover conditions and there are neighboring 3G cells available, the inter-RAT handover is performed if allowed. Otherwise, the algorithm determines to perform the emergency handover of other types. Edge handover: Edge handover is a type of rescue handover based on the signal level. To trigger an edge handover, the receive level of the target cell should be at least one hysteresis value (hysteresis of inter-cell handover) higher than the receive level of the serving cell. When the receive level of the serving cell is lower than the edge handover threshold and the P/N criterion is met within a period of measurement time, the edge handover is triggered for the MS to maintain proper communication quality. Bad quality handover: The transmission quality of the link is measured in bit error ratio (BER). The BSC determines the quality of a radio link based on the quality level in the MR. There are eight quality levels ranging from 0 to 7. Level 0 is the best and level 7 is the worst. Bad quality level may be resulted from low signal power or channel interference. When the receive quality of the serving cell is lower than the BQ handover threshold, the BSC starts the handover algorithm for the MS to maintain proper communication quality. This procedure is called BQ handover. If the serving cell meets the conditions to trigger the bad quality handover, penalty is performed on the originating cell after a successful handover to prevent a handover back to the cell due to other causes. Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


33


1 Basic Features

Interference handover: When the receive level of the serving cell is good, the network starts the interference handover for the MS to maintain proper communication quality if the receive quality deteriorates to a certain degree. If interference handover is triggered, the quality of the channel in the serving cell is affected to some extent. Conversation, however, can be maintained. At the same time, the receive level of the serving cell is relatively high and other channel in the serving cell may be affected to some extent. Therefore, the intra-cell handover is recommended. PBGT handover: PBGT handover is also referred to as better cell handover. The PBGT handover is based on the path loss. In PBGT handover, the system searches in real-time for a cell with less path loss and in compliance with the system requirements. Then, the BSC determines whether a handover is required. Compared with other handover algorithms, the PBGT handover is triggered on the basis of path loss instead of receive level. Hierarchical handover: The radio systems with the same coverage can be divided into four layers. The highest layer, also the fourth layer, is the umbrella-shaped GSM900 cell with wide coverage. This GSM900 cell implements the coverage and the connection of the fast-moving MS. The third layer is composed of GSM900 macro cells. These are the most widely used cells of the current system. Most of the MSs camp on this layer. The second layer is composed of DCS1800 micro cells with smaller coverage. The DCS1800 cell is also the target cell for capacity expansion aiming at solving the problem of insufficient frequency resources. The bottom layer is composed of DCS1800 pico cells, which aims to meet the requirements of the hot spot or the blind spot. The cell at the lower layer has a higher priority than the cell at the higher layer. Inter-layer handover: This handover is performed between different layers or between different hierarchies at the same layer. The inter-layer handover is not performed between cells at the same layer and the same hierarchy. If the following situations occur in a layered and hierarchical network: 

A cell with a higher priority exists.



The cell meets the conditions to trigger the hierarchical handover. That is, the signal level of a neighboring cell is higher than the sum of inter-layer handover threshold and hysteresis.



The P/N criterion is met. That is, within period P, the conditions to trigger the handover are met for period N.

Then, the call is handed over to the cell with a higher priority even if the serving cell can provide good services. The purpose of hierarchical handover is to direct the traffic of the MS to the cell with a higher priority so that the traffic can be distributed more properly. During the call, the hierarchical handover flexibly adjusts the traffic distribution between different layers to meet the requirements of various networking modes.

Enhancement 

GBSS14.0 After being decoupled from Huawei handover II, handover between full-rate and halfrate TCHs can be enabled when Huawei handover I is used. Handovers between full-rate and half-rate TCHs include RQI-based handovers and capacity- and quality-based handovers. RQI is short for radio quality indicator. A handover penalty inheritance mechanism is provided for load handovers. A successful load handover prevents ping pong handovers and ensures that the penalty cell list of the source cell is inherited.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


34


1 Basic Features

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA



Prerequisite Features GBFD-110801 Processing of Measurement Report or GBFD-110802 Pre-processing of Measurement Report



Mutually Exclusive Features GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover

1.3.6 GBFD-110607 Direct Retry Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary Directed retry is a special type of handover. That is, during the assignment procedure, the BSC initiates the directed retry procedure to switch the MS to a neighboring cell if no TCH is available or the traffic load is heavy in the serving cell.


This feature helps reduce the call access failure due to TCH congestion in the serving cell, and hence increases the access success rate.



This feature can balance the traffic load between different cells, and hence avoids the traffic load imbalance among cells.

Description When the MS initiates a call, the BSC determines the assignment procedure that is to be used according to the load of the current cell if the BSC receives an ASSIGN REQ message from the MSC. There are three types of assignment procedures: normal assignment procedure, mode modification procedure, and directed retry procedure. If the load of the cell is so high Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


35


1 Basic Features

that the cell does not admit a new service or that a newly admitted service will affect the existing services, the BSC determines to perform a directed retry. The directed retry procedure is as follows: The BSC sends a CHAN ACTIV message to the target cell. After receiving a CHAN ACTIV ACK message, the BSC requests circuit service resources. After the requested resources are allocated successfully, the BSC sends an HO CMD to the MS through the originating cell. The MS sends an HO ACC message in the target cell to attempt to access the network. The BTS sends an HO DETECT message to notify the BSC of the request and sends the PHY INFO message to the MS. The MS accesses the network through the FIRST SABM frame. Then, the BTS sends an EST IND message and a UA frame to the MS for acknowledgment. The MS sends an HO CMP message to the BSC through the target cell. Then, the BSC sends an ASS CMP message to the MSC to process signaling in other assignment procedures. The mobile originated procedure is complete. Based on the homing BSC and MSC of the serving cell and target cell, the directed retry can be classified into these types: intra-BSC directed retry, inter-BSC directed retry, and interMSC directed retry. The directed retry helps reduce the call access failures due to TCH congestion in the serving cell, increase the access success rate, and improve the network quality.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA



Prerequisite Features −



GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover or GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover


Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


36


1 Basic Features

1.3.7 GBFD-110608 SDCCH Handover Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary SDCCH handover refers to the handover from one SDCCH to another SDCCH in the immediate assignment procedure.

Benefits This feature helps improve the access success rate of MSs on the edge of the network.

Description The SDCCH handover refers to the handover from one SDCCH to another SDCCH. This feature helps improve the access success rate of MSs on the edge of the network, improving the network quality. The handover decision in SDCCH status is the same as that in TCH status. That is, the TA handover, interference handover, BQ handover, signal level rapid fall handover, and edge handover are allowed, and the load handover, PBGT handover, concentric handover, and AMR handover are not allowed. In addition, the parameter used for handover decision in SDCCH status is the same as that used for handover decision in TCH status. Generally, the time for seizing the SDCCH is short, and therefore the SDCCH handover seldom occurs. To prevent unnecessary handovers due to inaccurate MR in the initial phase of call setup, the minimum time to start the SDCCH handover can be configured to control the handover rate of the signaling channel.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Other NEs Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

37


1 Basic Features

NA 






1.3.8 GBFD-110401 Basic Cell Selection Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary When the MS is powered on or moves from a blind spot to a coverage area, the MS searches for all frequencies that the PLMN allows and selects a proper cell to camp on. This procedure is called cell selection.

Benefits This feature facilitates the automatic selection of the network on the MS and avoids the complexity of manual operations.

Description The cell selection involves two scenarios: 

The MS does not store any information about the BCCH TRX. The MS sets a search frequency band first. When the MS is tuned to the frequency with the highest level, it decides whether this frequency is the BCCH TRX. If it is the BCCH TRX, the MS tries to decode the SCH to synchronize with this frequency and read the BCCH system broadcast messages. The MS camps on this cell if the MS can decode the BCCH data correctly and confirms that this cell belongs to the selected PLMN, parameter C1 exceeds 0, and that the access to this cell is not denied. Otherwise, the MS is tuned to the frequency with the second highest level and repeats the decoding and data verification procedures until the MS finds the available cell.



The MS stores the information about the BCCH frequency. The MS searches for the stored BCCH frequency first. If the MS can decode the BCCH data of the cell but cannot camp on this cell, it checks the BA (BCCH) list. If none of the BCCH frequency in the list is suitable, the MS initiates the cell selection procedure without the BCCH message mentioned earlier. Whether an MS can select a cell to camp on is also influenced by the following factors:



Two parameters in system information 1 Cell bar access (CBA): It indicates whether a cell allows access of an MS. Cell bar access is a one-bit code: Value 0 indicates that the access is allowed, and value 1 indicates that the access is not allowed. This parameter does not influence the access of MSs that are handed over to the cell. Access control (AC): It can be graded from level 0 to level 9 and from level 11 to level 15. Usually each GSM subscriber has an access level and each level is represented by one bit: Value 1 indicates that the current cell does not allow the access of the MS with the corresponding level value. Otherwise, the access is allowed. Subscribers with level

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


38


1 Basic Features

11 to level 15 have higher priority over subscribers with level 0 to level 9 in access, but there is no priority difference within level 11 to level 15 or within level 0 to level 9. 

The minimum receive level allowed in system information 3: RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN: It is the signal level threshold represented by a 6-bit code. The range 0 to 63 corresponds to the level value range -C110 dBm to -C47 dBm.



Access parameter CBQ in system information 4 Cell Bar Qualify (CBQ): It is a one-bit code. CBQ and CBA together indicate the priority status of the cell. For details, see following table.

CBQ

CBA

Priority Status of Cell Selection

Cell Reselection Status

0

0

Normal

Normal

0

1

Barred

Barred

1

0

Low

Normal

1

1

Low

Normal

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


39


1 Basic Features

1.3.9 GBFD-110402 Basic Cell Re-selection Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary The MS in idle mode reselects the cell based on the trigger condition to find a cell that can provide better services. This procedure is called cell reselection.

Benefits The MS is always bound to a relatively good cell to obtain better service quality.

Description The MS in idle mode periodically measures the receive level of the downlink BCCH TRX of the serving cell and that of all downlink BCCH TRX in the BA list indicated by the BCCH system information. Based on the corresponding algorithm, the MS then calculates the C2 value and determines whether to select a new serving cell. The MS periodically reselect cells based on the cell reselection algorithm. In this way, the MS can find a cell that can provide better service. This feature enables the MS to bind to a relatively good cell to obtain better service quality. The cell reselection of the MS is based on the BA list provided in the system broadcast information about the serving cell. The GSM network has two BA lists. One is transmitted in the system information on the BCCH, used for cell selection and reselection of MSs in idle mode. The other is transmitted in the system information on the SACCH, used to inform the MS about which BCCH TRX is used for handover monitoring in dedicated mode. The MS triggers the cell reselection procedure in any one of the following scenarios (if the C2 algorithm is not activated, that is, C2 = C1): 

The C2 value of a cell (belonging to the same location area as the current cell) exceeds the C2 value of the current cell for five consecutive seconds.



The C1 value of a cell (belonging to a location area different from that of the current cell) exceeds the sum of the C2 value of the current serving cell and cell selection hysteresis value for five consecutive seconds.



The current serving cell is barred.



The MS detects a downlink failure.



The C1 value of the serving cell is less than 0 for five consecutive seconds.



The access attempt fails after the number of retransmissions exceeds the maximum one during the random access of the MS.

The following parameter in system information 4 determines whether to activate the C2 calculation: PI (Cell Reselect Parameters Indication) indicates whether the MS uses C2 as cell reselection parameter and whether the parameters related to the C2 formula exist. It is a one-bit code: 0 indicates that the MS uses C1 as the cell reselection parameter; 1 indicates that the MS uses C2 retrieved from the system information as the cell reselection parameter.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


40


1 Basic Features

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.4 Connection Management 1.4.1 GBFD-110501 Call Control Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary By performing the call control procedure, the BSS provides required radio resources and terrestrial circuit to the call so that the CN can complete the call connection procedure.

Benefits Call control is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS speech services.

Description Huawei GBSS supports MOC, MTC, and emergency call. By using resource management algorithms and control functions, the BSC provides the transmission channel for the call control signaling between the MS and the MSC by establishing the RR connection. In the call Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


41


1 Basic Features

control, the BSS handles the call requests by priorities. For example, the emergency call takes precedence over common calls, and therefore the BSS preferentially allocate the required resources to the emergency call. For the BSC, the call control mainly involves the radio channel allocation, A interface resource allocation with the coordination of MSC, and TCH release. The following call procedures are supported: 

MOC



MTC



Emergency call



MS-originated call release



Network-originated call release

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.4.2 GBFD-110502 Assignment and Immediate Assignment Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


42


1 Basic Features

Summary Immediate assignment and assignment are two important procedures during the call setup. By performing the immediate assignment procedure, the MS can establish an RR connection with the network. By performing the assignment procedure, the network assigns TCHs to the MS. In this way, a stable service connection is established between the network and the MS.

Benefits Immediate assignment and assignment are basic features for the operators to provide the CS speech services. Excellent immediate assignment and assignment algorithms ensure relatively high KPIs, and therefore improves the radio network performance.

Description Huawei GBSS supports the immediate assignment procedure, immediate assignment combination, and corresponding assignment procedure specified in GSM specifications. The purpose of the immediate assignment is to establish the RR connection between the MS and the network. By performing the assignment procedure, the BSS assigns the TCH to the MS. The assignment is classified into early assignment for MOC, late assignment for MOC, very early assignment for MOC, early assignment for MTC, late assignment for MTC, and very early assignment for MTC. 

Immediate assignment The immediate assignment procedure is initiated every time the MS responds to the paging request or the MS initiates a service request. The purpose of the immediate assignment is to establish the RR connection between the MS and the network. In the immediate assignment procedure, the MS sends a CHANNEL REQUEST message on the random access channel (RACH). The network then responds with an IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT message to instruct the MS to access the network on the dedicated channel. This channel can be a stand-alone dedicated control channel (SDCCH) or a TCH. Huawei BSC supports cell-level SDCCH immediate assignment and TCH immediate assignment.



Immediate assignment combination Each immediate assignment from the BSC on the Abis interface includes the response for only one MS's channel request message. The response messages for channel request on the Um interface, however, are of three types: immediate assignment, immediate assignment extended and immediate assignment reject. One immediate assignment extended may include the responses for two immediate assignment messages and one immediate assignment reject may include the immediate assignment commands (reject type) for a maximum of four MSs. To improve the processing efficiency on the Um interface, the BTS encapsulates as many immediate assignment commands as possible into one immediate assignment extended message or immediate assignment reject message on the Um interface and sends it to the MS. This type of processing method is called immediate assignment combination.



Early assignment for MOC Early assignment for MOC is a procedure in which the MOC is assigned a TCH before the call is established. After the immediate assignment is complete, the network sends the assignment command to the MS, requesting the calling party to seize the TCH even if the Altering message is not received. In this case, the ring tone is generated by the network.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


43




1 Basic Features

Late assignment for MOC In terms of signaling, the network sends the assignment command to the MS only after the Alerting message from the called party is received, requesting the calling party to seize the TCH. In this case, the ring tone is generated by the MS because no TCH is available before the connection is established.



Very early assignment for MOC The very early assignment for MOC is a procedure in which the TCH instead of the SDCCH is assigned to the calling party during the immediate assignment phase. This function increases the service access speed. The system performs the authentication, ciphering, other signaling exchanges, and subsequent call connection procedures on the TCH. After receiving the ASS REQ message from the network, the BSS changes the TCH used for signaling exchanges to a real TCH by using the Mode Modify command.



Early assignment for MTC Early assignment for MTC is a procedure in which the MTC is assigned a TCH before the call is established. In terms of signaling, the MTC establishment is triggered when the Paging Request message from the network is received. After the immediate assignment is complete, the network sends the assignment command to the MS, requesting the called party to seize the TCH even if the Altering message is not received. In this case, the ring tone is generated by the network.



Late assignment for MTC In terms of signaling, the network sends the assignment command to the MS only after the Alerting message is received, requesting the called party to seize the TCH. In this case, the ring tone is generated by the MS because no TCH is available before the connection is established.



Very early assignment for MTC The very early assignment for MTC is a procedure in which the TCH instead of the SDCCH is assigned to the called party during the immediate assignment phase. This function increases the service access speed. The system performs the authentication, ciphering, other signaling exchanges, and subsequent call connection procedures on the TCH. After receiving the ASS REQ message from the network, the BSS changes the TCH used for signaling exchanges to a real TCH by using the Mode Modify command.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

CN Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

44


1 Basic Features

NA 

Other NEs NA







1.4.3 GBFD-110503 Call Reestablishment Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary When the MS encounters a radio link failure during the call, the call reestablishment procedure can be used to reestablish the radio link connection so that the original call can proceed.

Benefits The call is reestablished quickly after a call drop caused by the radio link failure. This mechanism shortens the call intermission, and therefore improves the user experience.

Description Call reestablishment is a procedure for connection recovery after the MS encounters a radio link failure during the call. Call reestablishment may occur in a new cell or new location area. The initiation of the call reestablishment attempt depends on the call status and whether the cell allows call reestablishment. After detecting a radio link failure, the BTS sends a radio link failure message to the BSC. The BSC then releases the corresponding radio resource and waits for the MS to initiate the call reestablishment. After detecting a radio link failure, the MS sends a Channel Request message for call reestablishment) in the selected cell (the original cell or a new cell) to the BSS. The BSS then initiates and completes the immediate assignment procedure. After the immediate assignment is complete, the MS sends a call reestablishment request to the MSC. The MSC initiates the encryption and assignment procedures. The call establishment is almost complete. The MSC sends a status query message to the MS to confirm whether the call status or attach status matches the status information stored on the MSC. The MS sends the MSC a status message to report the call status or attach status. The call reestablishment is complete. During the call reestablishment, the MS cannot return to the idle mode. Therefore, when the MS selects a cell in a different location area as the target cell for call reestablishment, the location update procedure cannot be performed until this call terminates. The MSC controls the call reestablishment procedure, and the BSC is responsible for the channel establishment and layer 3 message forwarding. Other processing is not required.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


45


1 Basic Features

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN The MSC must support this feature.



Other NEs NA







1.4.4 GBFD-112501 TCH Re-assignment Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary The TCH re-assignment refers to that the BSC re-assigns a TCH to the MS after a TCH assignment fails.


Minimizes the impact on the call continuity caused by the TRX channel fault, and therefore ensures a successful first dialing.



Greatly reduces the assignment failures caused by the frequency interference in a cell, and therefore minimizes the impact on the call continuity and improve the service quality.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


46


1 Basic Features

Description During a call, the BSC assigns a TCH to the MS after receiving an assignment request message from the MSC. Then, the assignment command is issued to the MS on the Um interface. If the TCH assignment fails because of various causes such as the co-channel interference, the BSC re-assigns another TCH to the MS instead of sending an assignment failure message to the MSC. If the TCH re-assignment is successful, the BSC sends a message to the MSC, indicating that the assignment is complete; otherwise, the BSC sends a message to the MSC, indicating that the assignment fails.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.4.5 GBFD-119202 Packet Assignment Taken Over by the BTS Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary With this feature, the immediate assignment of packets and the uplink assignment of packets are performed by the BTS instead of the BSC. The BSC pre-allocates the radio resources in the uplink to the BTS so that the BTS completes the uplink TBF establishment and resource scheduling in advance. Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


47


1 Basic Features


Moving immediate assignment of packets to the BTS can increase the initial access rate of the PS services and therefore improves end user experience.



Moving uplink assignment of packets to BTS can improve the performance of the TCP application such as the FTP downloading by optimizing the rate of sending the TCP ACK message in the downlink, enhancing the user experience.



Moving immediate assignment of packets to BTS

Description Moving immediate assignment of packets to BTS is an optimization of the uplink immediate assignment. Generally, after the MS sends the Packet Channel Request message, the BTS forwards the message to the BSC to perform the immediate assignment. To improve the access rate of the MS, the BSC can pre-allocate the uplink TBF resources after the BTS is initialized and then sends the resource information to the BTS. When the MS sends the Packet Channel Request message, the BTS uses the resource information to immediately assign a channel and establish the uplink TBF for the MS. In this manner, the MS can begin to send data blocks after receiving the immediate assignment message. Meanwhile, the BTS notifies the BSC that the MS already accesses the specified channel and the BSC should be responsible for the subsequent scheduling of the radio resources. 

Moving uplink assignment of packets to BTS During the downlink transmission process, if there is data to be transmitted in the uplink, the uplink channel request information is carried in the PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK message to request the uplink TBF establishment. Generally, the MS must wait for the BTS to forward the channel request information to the BSC to implement the channel assignment. To improve the access rate of the MS, the BSC can pre-allocate the uplink TBF resources after the BTS is initialized and then sends the resource information to the BTS. When receiving the channel request of the MS, the BTS uses the resource information to immediately assign a channel and establish the uplink TBF for the MS. In this manner, the MS can begin to send data blocks after receiving the immediate assignment message. Meanwhile, the BTS notifies the BSC that the MS already establishes the uplink TBF and the BSC should be responsible for the subsequent scheduling of radio resources. As a result, the time for the interaction between the BTS and the BSC is saved during the access of the MS. This feature significantly reduces uplink access delay in TDM transmission mode.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware A built-in PCU, a packet-service processing board, and a Gb interface board are required.



BSC6910 Hardware NA



Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


48


1 Basic Features

RRU3929/RRU3926/RRU3936/RRU3942/MRFUe/MRFUd do not support this feature. The DRFU, RRU3004, RRU3908/RRU3008 V1 do not support this feature since GBSS9.0. 

GBTS(UMPT) Hardware GBTS(UMPT) does not support this feature.



MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA






Mutually Exclusive Features GBFD-119507 PS Downlink DTX

1.5 Radio Resource Management 1.5.1 GBFD-111001 TRX Management Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary TRX management involves four procedures about the TRX to support the signaling flow on the control plane of layer 3.

Benefits TRX management is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS speech services. This feature enables the management of the error reporting, flow control, and radio resources of the TRX such as SACCH resources. In Huawei GBSS, this feature can be implemented completely on the BSC side. Therefore, the management operations on the BTS are avoided, O&M is simplified, O&M expenditure is reduced, and thereby O&M efficiency is improved.

Description To enable the Abis interface to support the signaling flow on the control plane of layer 3 specified by 3GPP TS 44.018/3GPP TS 24.008, a set of TRX-level service management procedures are provided. This set of procedures is referred to as TRX management. Procedures involved in the TRX management are all completed at the BTS or BSC without being directed to the core network elements. The procedures are as follows: 

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

SACCH filling information modification procedure Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

49


1 Basic Features

The BSC informs the BTS of the new system information used on all downlink SACCHs so that the BTS can instruct the MS to initiate the system information updating procedure. 

Radio resource indication procedure The BTS informs the BSC of the interference level on the idle dedicated channels of each TRX. Therefore, the BSC is completely informed of the interference level of the current idle channels to facilitate subsequent channel assignments.



Flow control procedure The frame unit controller (FUC) on a TRX informs the BSC of the TRX overload due to CCCH overload, AGCH overload, or TRX processor overload.



Error reporting procedure The BTS informs the BSC of the detected downlink errors that cannot be reported by other procedures.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.5.2 GBFD-111002 Radio Link Management Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


50


1 Basic Features

Summary Radio link management involves not only the establishment and release of radio links but also the transfer of layer 3 messages.

Benefits Radio link management is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS speech services. This feature involves the establishment and release of radio links, the transfer of layer 3 messages, and the real-time monitoring of radio links, and therefore facilitates the basic radio link management.

Description Radio link management, mainly used for the establishment and release of radio links and the message forwarding, manages the data link layer. In the procedures in the radio link management, the BTS and the BSC can perform channel status management, initial service establishment and service release. The procedures involved in the radio link management are as follows: 

Link establishment and release procedures Link establishment indication: In this procedure, the BTS informs the BSC that the multi-frame link has been established. The BSC establishes an SCCP link to the MSC according to this indication procedure. Link establishment request: In this procedure, the BSC requests to establish a multiframe link on the radio path. Link release indication: In this procedure, The BTS informs the BSC that the radio link release initiated by the MS is complete. Link release request: In this procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to release a radio link.



Transparent transmission of layer 3 messages Transmission of a transparent layer 3 message in acknowledged mode: In this procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to forward a transparent layer 3 message on the Um interface in acknowledged mode. Reception of a transparent layer 3 message in acknowledged mode: In this procedure, the BTS informs the BSC that a transparent layer 3 message on the Um interface is received in acknowledged mode. Transmission of a transparent layer 3 message in unacknowledged mode: In this procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to forward a transparent layer 3 message in unacknowledged mode. Reception of a transparent layer 3 message in unacknowledged mode: In this procedure, the BTS informs the BSC that a transparent layer 3 message on the Um interface is received in unacknowledged mode.



Notification and handling of the link fault Link error indication: In this procedure, the BTS informs the BSC of the errors on the radio link layer.

Enhancement None

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


51


1 Basic Features

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.5.3 GBFD-111003 Radio Common Channel Management Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary Radio common channel management involves the management of common control channels such as PCH, RACH, AGCH, NCH, PPCH, PRACH, and PAGCH.

Benefits Radio common channel management is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS speech services.

Description 

Common control channels Common control channels include PCH, RACH, AGCH, NCH, PPCH, PRACH, and PAGCH. Paging Channel (PCH): Downlink channel. The MS listens to the PCH at intervals to determine whether there is a call request from the MSC. RACH: Uplink channel: The MS accesses the network through the RACH and requests the network to assign an SDCCH.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


52


1 Basic Features

Access Grant Channel (AGCH): Downlink channel. The network informs the MS of the assigned dedicated channel (SDCCH or TCH) on the AGCH. Notification Channel (NCH): Downlink channel, used for voice group call service (VGCS) and voice broadcast service (VBS). Packet Paging Channel (PPCH): Downlink channel. The MS listens to the PPCH at intervals to determine whether there is a packet call to the MS from the SGSN. Packet Random Access Channel (PRACH): Uplink channel. The MS requests for network access on the PRACH. Packet Access Grant Channel (PAGCH): Downlink channel. The network informs the MS of the assigned packet data service channel on the PAGCH. 

Radio common channel management The radio common channel management procedures involve the signaling procedures of MS access and assignment, and also the resource management of the common channel. The involved procedures are as follows: Channel request by MS: This procedure is triggered when the TRX detects a random access request (channel request message) from the MS. Paging: This procedure is used to page an MS on a paging sub-channel. It is used for the MOC and initiated by the MSC through the BSC. The BSC determines the paging group to be used according to the IMSI of the called MS. The values of this paging group are sent to the BTS along with the identity information of the MS. Immediate assignment: When the MS first accesses the BTS, the BSC assigns a dedicated channel for the MS immediately in this procedure. CCCH load indication: The BTS informs the BSC of the load information on a CCCH timeslot. If this load exceeds the load limit predefined in the system, the BTS sends the CCCH overload indication to the BSC periodically. Delete indication: In this procedure, the BTS informs the BSC that one immediate assignment message is deleted without being put in the AGCH queue due to AGCH overload. To do this, the BTS sends a Delete indication message to the BSC. Broadcast information modification: The BSC informs the BTS of the new information to broadcast on the BCCH. To do this, the BSC sends a BCCH information message to the BTS. Short message cell broadcast: In this procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to send the cell broadcast short message. VGCS establishment notification: On receiving the VGCS ASSIG REQ message from the CN, the BSC establishes a VGCS channel immediately or later based on the strategy information in the VGCS ASSIG REQ message. Then, the BSC sends the Notification information to the BTS. The BTS then sends this information to the MS. On receiving this information, the MS responds to the information accordingly.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


53




1 Basic Features







MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.5.4 GBFD-111004 Radio Dedicated Channel Management Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary Radio dedicated channel management involves the assignment, activation, release, management, and reporting of the dedicated channels such as SDCCH, SACCH, and TCH.

Benefits Radio dedicated channel management is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS speech services.

Description Radio dedicated channel management involves the assignment, activation, release, management, and reporting of the dedicated channels such as SDCCH, SACCH, and TCH. The involved procedures are as follows: Channel activation: In this procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to activate a dedicated channel for an MS. After this channel is activated, the BSC assigns this channel to the MS through the Immediate Assign, Assign Command, Additional Assign or Handover Command message. Channel mode modification: In this procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to change the mode of an activated channel. Handover detection: This procedure is used to detect the access of the switched MS between the target BTS and the target BSC. Start of encryption: This procedure is used to initiate the encryption procedure specified by GSM TS 04.08. Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


54


1 Basic Features

Measurement reporting: This procedure consists of the mandatory basic measurement reporting procedure and the optional measurement reporting procedure with pre-processing. In these two procedures, the BTS reports to the BSC all the parameters related to handover decision. SACCH deactivation: In this procedure, the BSC deactivates the related SACCH of a TRX according to the requirement of the channel release procedure specified by GSM TS 04.08. Radio channel release: In this procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to release a radio channel that is not in use. MS power control: In this procedure, the BSS controls the transmit power of the MS related to an activated channel. The MS power control decision should be implemented on the BSC or BTS. BTS transmit power control: In this procedure, the BSS controls the transmit power of the activated channel on the TRX. BSS transmit power control should be implemented on the BSC or BTS. Connection failure: In this procedure, the BTS informs the BSC that an activated dedicated channel is disconnected. SACCH information modification: In this procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to change the filling information (system information) on an SACCH. Talker detection: During a VGCS call, on receiving the Talker uplink access from the MS on the idle uplink VGCS channel, the BTS constructs the VGCS UPLINK GRANT message on the activated dedicated channel and reports to the BSC the detected Access delay received from the MS. Listener detection: When there is no listener in the cell, the dedicated radio downlink channel allocated to the VGCS/VBS should be released timely to improve the resource utilization. The BSC periodically broadcasts the Uplink free message in the cell. After all the listeners receive this message, a Talker uplink access message is sent to the BTS on the idle uplink VGCS channel. The BTS constructs the VGCS UPLINK GRANT message on the activated dedicated channel and sends a listener detection message to the BSC. The BTS uses this message to inform the BSC of the Access delay detected on the MS.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


55


1 Basic Features

NA 

Other NEs NA







1.5.5 GBFD-111005 Enhanced Channel Assignment Algorithm Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary Enhanced channel assignment algorithm is adopted to allocate the optimum channel based on various factors.

Benefits By taking into account of various factors, this feature enables the BSS to allocate the optimum channel to each call, and hence ensures better voice quality for subscribers. This feature enables the BSS to provide as many services as possible by using limited channel resources, maximizing the service capacity of the network.

Description 

Channel assignment priorities: Enhanced channel assignment algorithm is adopted for the selection of an optimum channel. Each channel is assigned with a priority level. The channel of lower priority level is less likely to be allocated than the channel of higher priority level. Enhanced channel assignment algorithm provides four types of priority levels: capacity, quality, PS coordination, and management. The four types of priorities work together and form the overall priority of each radio channel. A higher overall priority value indicates a higher priority level and an earlier assignment of the radio resource accordingly. Four factors are considered in determining the priority level: capacity, quality, PS coordination, and management. The priority level has the following sub-priorities: frequency band, data rate, concentric cell, AMR, interference, seizure record, number of PDCHs, and TRX.



Channel assignment principles Channel assignment based on interference: The channels with less interference should be preferentially assigned except in the following situations: One situation is that for the high priority calls or subscribers, the MSC should prevent the assignment of channels whose interference exceeds a predefined interference threshold. Another situation is that to improve the call completion rate and voice quality, the calls with better receive level should be assigned relatively high-interference channels and those with worse receive level should be assigned relatively low-interference channels, taken into account the maximum transmit power of the MS and the path loss in a certain call environment.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


56


1 Basic Features

Channel assignment based on channel configuration: Take into account factors such as whether the channel and BCCH belong to the same TRX. Channel assignment based on channel configuration helps reduce the network interference and hence improve the network quality. Channel assignment based on history record: This algorithm has the memory function. The history record consists of the information on successful and failed channel seizures and on the call drops during the seizures. In addition, the BSC needs to determine whether a failed seizure and a call drop during a seizure are caused by radio channel faults. Such history records provide reliable basis for the current channel assignment. Channel assignment based on load balance: This mechanism facilitates the even distribution of channel seizures on different TRXs. This not only reduces the co-channel and adjacent-channel interference but also prevents the situation wherein a large number of calls are carried on certain TRXs. Channel assignment based on specific calls: Specific calls such as intra-cell handover and concentric cell handover have special channel assignment strategies. The intra-cell handovers are mainly triggered by factors related to channel quality. Therefore, the frequency of the TRX that carries the original channel is likely to be interfered. If the original channel is in frequency hopping mode, certain frequencies in the frequency hopping group are likely to be interfered to a great extent. Therefore, a channel of a different TRX or a different frequency hopping group as the original channel should be allocated for the intra-cell handover.

Enhancement 

GBSS8.1 Preferentially allocating channels on BCCH carrier for non-AMR speech services: Generally, in a tight frequency reuse network, loose frequency reuse pattern, such as 4 x 3 mode, is applied to the BCCH TRX; tight frequency reuse pattern, such as 1 x 3 mode, is applied to the TCH TRX. The non-AMR speech (including FR, EFR, and HR) is more sensitive to interference than the AMR speech. Therefore, if the network supports the AMR speech, adhere to the following principles in channel assignment: For MSs that do not support AMR speeches, preferentially allocate the channels on the carriers in loose frequency reuse pattern, such as the BCCH carrier. For MSs that support the AMR speech, allocate the channels on the carriers in tight frequency reuse pattern to improve the overall voice quality in the network.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


57




1 Basic Features

Other NEs NA







1.6 Operation and Maintenance 1.6.1 MRFD-210301 Configuration Management Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Summary This feature provides operators with the method for collecting and managing the information about NEs (MBSC and MBTS). It can control the links between the NEs. The graphic user interface (GUI) makes it easy for configuration management.

Benefits This feature provides a descriptive overview of the status of the network and supports fast installation, capacity expansion, and data configuration of the network.

Description This feature provides operators with the method for collecting and managing the information about NEs (MBSC and MBTS). It can control the links between the NEs. The graphic user interface (GUI) makes it easy for configuration management. The NE configuration can be classified into five levels: 1.

Initial configuration Design the initial configuration of the MBSC and MBTS.

2.

Basic site configuration Configuration of the O&M communication between the MBSC, MBTS, and the U2000

3.

External site hardware configuration on the MBTS side Configuration of TMA data and antennas

4.

MBTS configuration and site-specific configuration on the MBTS side Data configuration of the A/Iu interface, Abis/Iub interface, Iur-g/Iur interface, and the transport network

5.

Cell/TRX configuration on the MBSC side

Data configuration of cells, channels, and neighboring cells

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


58


1 Basic Features

Configuration from level 1 to level 3 can be implemented either with the GUI of the configuration tool or with the pre-defined configuration files on the LMT. Configuration of level 4 and level 5 can be implemented either using the U2000 or using the configuration tool. 

Online/Offline data configuration and status query The configuration data is not sent to the host until it takes effect. This improves the efficiency of configuring a large quantity of data. The MBSC supports offline configuration based on host subracks. Therefore, the services are not interrupted during capacity expansion. During the switchover of the IP interface board and the ATM/TDM interface board, offline configuration supports the modification of the interface board type and the switchover of the active/standby boards. Online data configuration enables the data to be sent to the host immediately after the configuration. There is no need to reset the system or reload the data. X.731 defines the object status. The operators can query the object status such as the board status or cell status and the time of the latest status change.



Configuration right control With the configuration right control, data can be configured only on the LMT of the MBSC/MBTS or the U2000 client. In addition, the operators always have the configuration right. This improves the reliability of the system.



Configuration rollback on the MBSC side When the equipment or network malfunctions due to improper data modification, operators can perform the rollback operation to restore the system in a short time.



MBSC data backup Two OMUs work in active/standby mode. The system synchronizes the data on the standby OMU with that on the active OMU. The MBSC supports automatic backup and manual backup. It provides a data backup and restoration tool.



Setting of network parameters The radio network parameters are of two types: MBSC-oriented parameters and celloriented parameters, which are used in different radio conditions. The MBSC can check the integrity and consistency of configuration data such as the data of a cell.



Detection of missing neighboring cell Based on the measurement information from the user equipment (UE), the neighboring cells missed for configuration can be detected and reported. This helps the operators optimize the configuration of neighboring cells and therefore improves the network planning efficiency.

Enhancement 

GBSS9.0 Web LMT: The operation and maintenance GUI of the MBSC uses the Web LMT based on the browser/server mode. The configuration GUI uses the CME. The MML client is incorporated in the Web LMT and therefore the configuration and maintenance for the MBSC can be carried out by running MML commands. After the Web LMT is used, there is no need to install the LMT software on the local PC. The configuration and maintenance for the MBSC can be carried out through the Web browser. In addition, the upgrade of the software on the local PC is not required when the MBSC software is upgraded, and therefore the operation efficiency is significantly improved.



Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

GBSS12.0 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

59


1 Basic Features

Cell Frequency Band Modification in One Key: The frequency band of a cell can be changed by MML commands or CME reconfiguration. The new frequency band or bands must contain the earlier frequency band of the cell. For example, change a GSM900 cell to a GSM900/DCS1800 cell. This feature applies only to the frequency band adjustment scenario where a single-band network is changed to a dual-band network.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs This feature is implemented by the U2000 or LMT.







1.6.2 MRFD-210302 Performance Management Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Summary This feature periodically takes samples of counters about the management objects, bearer resources, and services. The sampled data is then collected, saved, monitored, and analyzed. In this way, the operating status of the network can be obtained. Therefore, this feature helps operators quickly locate and solve problems and optimize the network.

Benefits This feature provides an efficient method for monitoring the network performance and facilitates the network troubleshooting and optimization. The real-time performance monitoring is a more effective feature.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


60


1 Basic Features

Description Performance management helps collect the measurable performance data to obtain the network operating status, helping the operators quickly locate and solve problems and optimize the network. 

Performance measurement management

This feature provides operators with a method for managing the measurable performance data. For the new commissioning NEs (MBSC and MBTS), the pre-defined performance statistics completely starts after the initial start-up or restart. The performance statistics can be suspended or restored manually. The MBSC and MBTS provide the interfaces between them and the U2000, allowing the U2000 to collect necessary statistic data and to configure the related parameters including statistic counters and periods. The statistic data is saved on the U2000 in binary-formatting files in every statistic period. The result files are saved on the MBTS for up to 24 hours or on the MBSC for up to 10 days. If a fault occurs in data transmission, you can obtain the lost data using the U2000. 

Performance measurement counter

Performance measurement counters include key counters and other counters. Key counters are used to generate the KPIs that are defined on the U2000, and these predefined counters are initialized immediately after the MBSC and the MBTS start. Customized KPIs and formulas can be added, modified, and deleted on the U2000. The counters that indicate network performance can also be added if required. In the UMTS network, the following measurement objects are supported: 

Cell measurement



Neighboring cell measurement



Inter-RAT neighboring cell measurement



RNC overall measurement



ATM transport measurement



IP transport measurement



Standard interface measurement



NE hardware measurement



Real-time performance monitoring

This feature supports real-time performance monitoring and enables the U2000 to display the monitoring results in charts. Therefore, it facilitates operations, such as troubleshooting, drive test, and network optimization. For details about how to configure real-time performance monitoring, see the U2000 online help. Monitoring tasks are managed on the U2000 client. The monitored data is displayed in curve and can be manually exported to a file for future use. Only data monitored within the recent four hours can be exported. For details about the specifications of monitoring tasks and objects to be monitored, see the U2000 performance specification guides.

The following items can be monitored in real time: 

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Equipment performance: CPU usage, clock source quality, and so on. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

61


1 Basic Features



Connection performance: SIR measurement, UE transmit power, and so on.



Cell performance: PCPICH transmit power, number of UEs in the cell, and so on.



Link performance: IMA group, UNI link, and so on.



Service performance: RF performance, UL channel scanning, and resource usage.

In the GSM network, the following performance counters are supported: The measurements can be classified into the following types according to the measurement object: 

BSC measurement



Cell measurement



TRX measurement



Neighboring cell measurement

The measurements can be classified into the following types according to the MS status: 

Paging



Call



Measurement report



Channel allocation

Enhanced performance measurement: 

Measurement of incoming and outgoing cell handovers This measurement provides data about the incoming and outgoing cell handovers. The collected measurement data assists the operators in network adjustment and optimization.



Undefined adjacent cell measurement This measurement provides BSIC, BCCH frequency, average signal strength, number of MRs of adjacent cells that are included in the BA list but not included in the adjacent cell relationship table. The collected measurement data assists the operators in network adjustment and optimization.



Defined adjacent cell measurement This measurement provides BSIC, BCCH frequency, average signal strength, number of MRs of the defined adjacent cell. The collected measurement data assists the operators in network adjustment and optimization.



Uplink and downlink balance measurement This measurement provides the data about the balance between the uplink and downlink of TCHs. The uplink and downlink balance level is graded according to the receive levels in the uplink and downlink. The collected measurement data assists the operators in network adjustment and optimization.



Call drop measurement This measurement provides the average level and quality in the uplink and downlink, and also the average TA value of SDCCH call drops and TCH call drops. The collected measurement data assists the operators in network adjustment and optimization.



BTS out-of-service measurement This measurement is provided by the performance management of the BSC together with the U2000. This measurement provides the start time of BTS out-of-service, end time of BTS out-of-service (or service recovery time), and the duration of BTS out-of-service.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


62


1 Basic Features

Enhancement 

GBSS8.0 Supports the real-time performance monitoring and the counter measurement related to the built-in PCU.



GBSS8.1 Supports real-time traffic measurement, enhanced IP performance measurement, and measurement period of 24 hours. In addition, it supports the measurement of traffic statistics of group call and group broadcast on the BSC level and cell level.



GBSS12.0 Report Speed Improvement of U2000 Northbound Interface: The speed of reporting traffic statistics over the northbound interface of the U2000 is improved by moving the calculation functionality of KPIs from the U2000 to the BSC. The BSC calculates the KPIs based on the measured counters, and then sends the calculation result to the U2000. After synchronizing its measurement period with the measurement period of the BSC, the U2000 obtains the calculation result of the BSC. In this way, the U2000 can generate the northbound interface KPIs in a short period of time. In ideal conditions, the U2000 can generate the northbound interface KPIs in 10 to 15 minutes after synchronizing its measurement period with the measurement period of the BSC. The period of time required depends on the capacity of the BSC.



GBSS14.0 Supports disuse of performance counters and object parameters. The performance counters and object parameters to be disused will be reserved in two versions, that is, the current version and the next version.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA



GBTS(GTMU) Hardware The BTS3006C and BTS3002E do not support enhanced IP performance measurement.






MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs Performance management and real-time monitoring are implemented by the U2000.







Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


63


1 Basic Features

1.6.3 MRFD-210303 Inventory Management Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS7.0 and RAN5.1.

Summary This feature assists in reporting the information about the physical and logical objects of the NEs to the U2000, and also assists in managing this information on the U2000.

Benefits As a large number of devices are deployed on networks, it becomes difficult to manage equipment. For ease of equipment management, operators need to obtain the information about the physical device and some important logical information. With this feature, the information can be reported to the U2000, facilitating the asset management. In addition, operators can obtain the accurate decision-making data of the existing networks in time.

Description The inventory management helps operators to manage the network assets and configuration data. With this function, network assets and configuration data can be managed on the U2000. The objects that are managed by this function include physical objects (such as rack, frame, slot, board, and fan) and logic objects (such as cell, software, and patch). Upon a request from the U2000, the information about the network assets and configuration data are generated in an .xml file and then are sent to the U2000. The U2000 saves the uploaded information in the network inventory database. Upon a request from the U2000, the MBSC reports its information about the assets and configuration to the U2000. In terms of the method of collecting and reporting the information about the base station, the UMTS network is different from the GSM network. In the UMTS network, the NodeB works as an independent NE and supports the reporting of its inventory information to the U2000. In the GSM network, the inventory of the BTS is jointly controlled by the BSC and the BTS. The BTS inventory management system is deployed on the U2000. The U2000 sends the required inventory information command to the BSC on the southbound interface. On reception of this command, the BSC queries the inventory information about all the BTSs, generates files, and sends the files to the U2000. Then, the U2000 interprets the files and saves them in the database. Some inventory information can be imported by the manual input or other files. The U2000 supports the query, synchronization, modification, export, and import of the BTS inventory information.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


64


1 Basic Features

SHAPE

The BTS supports the reporting of the information about the electronic label, software version, and hardware version of the BTS boards as well as the information about the manufacturer of the heat exchanger. In addition, the BTS also supports the input and reporting of the bar code of the BTS cabinet. As the ID of a board, the electronic label provides the basis for board replacement, presents a traceable mark in the entire lifecycle of the board, and supplies the data required for the management, tracing, and maintenance of the board. The information about the electronic label of the BTS board includes: the board model, bar code, BOM code, description, production date, name of the manufacturer, and release number. The U2000 provides the import or modification function for the inventory information that is not supported by the BTS. That is, the information can be manually entered. The information includes the information about the BTS antenna, electronic label of the board that fails to report the electronic label (mainly purchased parts), and the ultimate service time of the board information area. This information is not sent to the BTS for storage but is saved only in the inventory management system on the U2000. In addition, no storage part is available in the BTS cabinet, and therefore the bar code of the cabinet needs to be manually entered on the U2000 or the LMT. The BTS supports the input of this information and also the storage of it in the main control board of the BTS. Then, the BTS sends the information to the BSC on the inventory management interface.

Enhancement 

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


65


1 Basic Features

Supports the reporting of the electronic label of the BTS board according to electronic label standards 3.0. 

GBSS8.1 Adds the reporting of the information about the software and hardware versions of the BTS boards, manufacturer of the heat exchanger, electronic labels of the BBU backplane, fan board, and power monitoring board, and the input and query of the electronic bar code of the cabinet.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs This feature is implemented by the U2000. Inventory information can be queried only on the U2000.







1.6.4 MRFD-210304 Faulty Management Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Summary This feature involves various fault management functions such as system auto test, fault detection, fault monitoring, and fault rectification of the UTRAN. This enables the operators to learn about the network fault timely and take proper measures to avoid service interruption.


Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Enables the automatic monitoring of the network equipment.


66


1 Basic Features



Enables the operators to learn about the actual state of the network timely and comprehensively by querying the active alarm list and alarm log.



Facilitates the manual board test, with which the operators can identify the faulty board timely.

Description The fault management involves system auto test, fault detection, fault monitoring, and fault rectification. This enables the operators to learn about the network fault timely and take proper measures to avoid service interruption. The automatic hardware test of the system is performed during the startup of the MBSC or MBTS. When the MBSC or MBTS is in operation, the system status monitoring can also be started manually if required. 

Fault detection This involves the fault detection of the physical layer, transmission link layer, and others. The fault detection can be started manually. Operators can either browse the monitoring result online or save the monitoring result as files.



Alarm management Operators can browse the real-time alarm information, query the historical alarm information, and save the alarm information as required. The online help provides detailed methods for clearing alarms.



Alarm correlation processing Based on certain built-in mechanism, the alarm correlation handling mechanism enables the system to keep the most important alarms instead of all the related alarms when a fault occurs. The number of alarms can be greatly reduced in this way and network problems can be easily identified and handled. This mechanism is pre-defined and incorporated in the NEs such as MBSC and MBTS. More alarm correlation processing mechanisms can be defined by the operators on the U2000.

The operators may also filter the alarms of an object. The alarms of this object, if filtered, are not reported. The alarms of the access network include MBSC alarm and MBTS alarm. MBSC alarm The MBSC alarm system provides two types of alarm output devices: alarm console and alarm box. The alarm box provides visual and audible alarms. The alarm console is a part of the OMC. It provides detailed alarm information, recovery suggestion, and alarm box control. The MBSC alarm system is composed of the BAM alarm module, centralized network management alarm database, alarm console, and alarm box. Alarm system accurately provides the fault information detected by the MBSC system to the maintenance personnel by sending alarm information. The maintenance personnel can then rectify the fault accordingly. 

Alarm severity

According to the severity and influence of the alarms, there are four alarm severities: critical, major, minor, and warning. Different severity of alarms is presented in different manner, such as color and sound. 

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Alarm classification


67


1 Basic Features

According to its subsystem and subsystem type, alarms can be classified into fault alarm and event alarm. Clearance alarms are provided for fault alarms. Event alarm has no corresponding clearance alarm. According to the cause of alarms, alarms can be classified into inter-module communication alarm, signaling subsystem alarm, clock subsystem alarm, and power supply subsystem alarm. These alarms help the maintenance engineers quickly locate the faults. This feature also provides alarm about software running, such as CPU overload alarm and GBAM hard disk capacity alarm. 

Alarm location and recovery suggestions

The alarm console provides detailed alarm information, including the ID of the board for which the alarm is generated, the potential cause and possible consequence of the alarm, and the recovery suggestion. 

Alarm box control

The alarm box control provides manual control of the alarm box. You can mute the alarm sound or turn off the LED for the alarm box manually by related MML command. The alarms can be printed in real time. The alarm parameters data can be configured and modified. Based on the configuration, the MBSC can automatically control where the alarms will be sent, such as to alarm box or to OMC alarm console. This enables flexible alarm control. 

Alarm query

The alarms can be queried in various conditions. You can browse the fault alarm, emergency event alarm, or other event alarms in real time on the alarm console. You can also query the history fault alarm, clear alarm, and event alarm according to alarm serial number, alarm ID, date and time of alarm, alarm module number, function number, or alarm severity. The queried historical alarms can be saved. 

Environment monitoring unit

Each subrack of the BSC6900 can connect to an environment monitoring unit (EMU) over the serial ports. The EMU has four types of ports: fixed analog ports (four) used for receiving -C48 V voltage, -C24 V voltage, temperature, and humidity alarms; extended external analog ports (four); fixed external Boolean ports (four) used for receiving water, smoke, infrared, and door status alarms; and extended external Boolean ports (32). Alarm information is stored on the U2000. MBSC has buffer capability. A maximum of 150 thousand historical alarm records can be stored. MBTS alarm MBTS alarms can be queried according to the site number, cell number, or TRX number (applicable to BTS) to confirm the failure and clearance states. MBTS alarms can be queried and displayed on both the alarm console at the remote end and the Site Maintenance System at the local end. The MBTS alarm supports the input interface of the environment alarm. The environment alarms supported by the MBTS are fire, smoke, temperature, humidity, door control, and main supply alarms. The ranges of alarms can be controlled by alarm threshold setting on the MBSC. The MBTS is also capable of clearing environment alarms to provide flexible clearance of the alarms.

Enhancement 

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


68


1 Basic Features

Supports the clearance of PS-related alarms, including device alarms and service alarms. 

GBSS8.1 Supports suppression of the intermittent and repeated alarms, alarm correlation processing, and enhanced alarm positioning information.



GBSS12.0 Support Alarm Restraint: Alarm Restraint:With this function, alarms operators can monitor the network and timely detect a fault. The number of alarms and the proper generation of alarms directly affect the efficiency in fault rectification. To prevent the generation of a great number of alarms, the generation of repeated alarms, and the generation of multiple alarms caused by one fault, the alarms are suppressed on the basis of temporal correlation and spatial correlation. To suppress alarms based on temporal correlation, the BSC compares each generated alarm with the related alarms generated before and after the alarm. Based on the comparison result, the BSC determines whether to report the alarm. To suppress alarms based on spatial correlation, the BSC correlates the alarms that must be reported. In this way, the information about multiple alarms is displayed in one alarm. The purpose of the preceding two measures is to integrate multiple alarms into one alarm. In this way, the number of alarms is reduced, whereas the usability of the alarm is increased. The system does not discard the suppressed alarms, and users can query these alarms.



GBSS14.0 OML Identification: The BSC identifies a BTS over the Abis interface based on the timeslot for the port where the OML of the BTS is configured. If transmission connections to two BTSs with the same configurations, including the site type, boards, cells, and TRXs, are reversed, the data configurations that the BSC sends to the two BTSs are also reversed. However, no alarm is reported because these two BTSs and their cells work properly. In this case, maintenance personnel cannot quickly identify the incorrect transmission connections. In practice, the reversed radio parameters for cells under these BTSs cause a decrease in the network KPIs and problems such as co-channel interference, adjacent-channel interference, and handover failures. The OML identification function allows the BSC to check the electronic label of a BTS after the OML to the BTS is set up. If the BSC detects that the electronic label is inconsistent with the configured one, the BSC does not allow the BTS to work and reports an alarm so that maintenance personnel can quickly identify the incorrect transmission connections. Fast Fault Location and Service Recovery: If a service-level or network-level fault occurs on the live network, services cannot quickly recover using common maintenance methods, such as reset, power-off, and board replacement because the faulty NE or board cannot be quickly located. In this condition, the Fast Fault Location and Service Recovery function can be used to quickly locate the fault. This function distinguishes faults by service or network and thereby provides diagnosis rules by scenario. Specifically, this function analyzes onsite counters, alarms, and logs according to the diagnosis rules and provides an analysis report. Based on the analysis report, maintenance engineers can locate the faulty board or subsystem and accordingly choose an appropriate troubleshooting measure.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


69




1 Basic Features

BSC6910 Hardware NA



GBTS(GTMU) Hardware The BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3900B, and BTS3900E do not support OML identification.



GBTS(UMPT) Hardware GBTS(UMPT) does not support OML identification.



MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs This feature is implemented by the U2000 (Huawei OMC) or RNC/NodeB LMT.







1.6.5 MRFD-210305 Security Management Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Summary This feature enhances the network security management by providing various user authorization and management mechanisms.

Benefits This feature provides user authorization and management mechanism, enhancing the network security management.

Description Security management enhances the system security in terms of the following aspects: 

Facilitates user management such as the management of user accounts, user rights, and user command groups.



Supports the backup and restore of the system data.



Adopts the Windows security policies for the IP services of the BAM to protect the system from network attacks.



Supports the installation of Windows antivirus software such as Officescan.



Collects the database operation logs and auditing logs.



Reports corresponding alarms when network attacks are detected or the number of unauthorized accesses exceeds the threshold.



Supports FTP over the Security Socket Layer (SSL).

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


70


1 Basic Features



Supports SSL for the communication between the OMC and the GBSS/RAN. This enables the encryption of all transmitted data.



Adds authority control for the binary interface between the GBSS/RAN and the OMC.



Records the information about the security logs for the binary interface between the GBSS/RAN and the OMC.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs The U2000 must support this feature.







1.6.6 MRFD-210309 DBS Topology Maintenance Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0 in the GSM and RAN 5.0 in the UMTS.

Summary The LMT provides the topology maintenance for the distributed base station, and therefore facilitates the maintenance operations.

Benefits This feature provides convenient O&M functions for the distributed base station, reducing the O&M expenditure of the operators.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


71


1 Basic Features

Description The distributed base station supports the automatic scan of the RRU topology. The LMT provides the topology maintenance for the distributed base station. The functions that supported by this feature are as follows: 

The networking structure of the distributed base station is displayed in a visualized way.



Different colors are used to mark the status of each BBU, RRU, and CRPI link.



The BBU or RRU can be selected directly from the displayed topology for maintenance.

Figure 1.1 UMTS NodeB topology

Figure 1.2 GSM BTS topology

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


72


1 Basic Features

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.6.7 MRFD-210310 BTS/NodeB Software USB Download Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS9.0 and RAN10.0.

Summary With this feature, the user or the maintenance personnel can download and activate the MBTS software using the USB without requiring the laptop. Therefore, the MBTS can be set up easily and quickly.

Benefits With this feature, the software upgrade is independent of Abis/Iub transmission. Therefore, the upgrade is shortened and the MBTS can be set up quickly with a low cost. In addition, the maintenance personnel do not need to enter the site again because they can perform the software commissioning remotely.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


73


1 Basic Features

Description The 3900 series MBTSs provide the USB port to download and activate the host software. After the MBTS hardware is installed, the system automatically upgrades the software when the USB disk is inserted. This feature enables the software upgrade to be performed using the USB without requiring a laptop. With this feature, the software upgrade is independent of Abis/Iub transmission. Therefore, the upgrade is shortened and the MBTS can be set up quickly with a low cost. After the software is activated and the system begins to operate, the hardware fault can be detected according to the indicator on the BBU panel so that the fault is rectified in the shortest time. In addition, the maintenance personnel do not need to enter the site again because they can perform the software commissioning remotely. This feature supports encryption and validity verification for configuration files in the USB disk. With this feature, users can encrypt configuration files in the USB disk using the USB disk encryption tool provided by the U2000, ensuring data security. The MBTS can parse encrypted configuration files and verify the validity of these files. However, this feature does not support encryption and parsing for software packages, but the MBTS can verify the validity of data in these software packages.

Enhancement 

GBSS14.0 All configuration files in the USB disk are encrypted using the USB disk encryption tool provided by the U2000. The files must be decrypted before being copied from the USB disk by a board.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA



GBTS(GTMU) Hardware The BTS3900, BTS3900A, BTS3900L, BTS3900AL, and DBS3900 support this feature.



GBTS(UMPT) Hardware The BTS3900, BTS3900A, BTS3900L, BTS3900AL, and DBS3900 support this feature.



MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


74


1 Basic Features

1.6.8 GBFD-111202 O&M of BTS Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary At the BTS OMC at the local end or the remote end, O&M can be performed for BTS logical objects or BTS boards. The logical objects include site, cell, baseband (BT), channel (CH), radio carrier (RC), and timeslot.

Benefits The BTS O&M has powerful functions, facilitates and simplifies the O&M, and reduces the O&M expenditure. Huawei GBSS BTS O&M system provides the following benefits: 

Flexible operations enable the operators to perform the O&M at either the local end or remote end as required by the engineering or O&M.



Compared with O&M at separated sites, the O&M system provided by Huawei GBSS reduces the manual operations and the O&M cost because Huawei GBSS supports the centralized O&M for BTSs controlled by one BSC.



The remote O&M system helps promptly locate and solve the problem of BTS operation, and hence reduces the operating expenditure.

Description The BTS O&M involves the following operations: query, loading, and activation of software version; query of site attributes; query of the usage of various resources; transmission performance test; reset in levels; environment monitoring; alarm masking; query of ring networking parameters. O&M of multiple BTSs This function reduces the work of maintenance personnel and also the possibility of improper operations, particularly in the case of large-scale operation. Huawei GBSS supports the four types of operations for multiple BTSs: query of fault, query of software version, forced loading of software, and software activation. O&M of cell O&M of cell involves the following operations: cell attribute query, cell administrative state change, cell system information sending, and forced cell handover. The forced cell handover provided by the BSC refers to the forced handover with or without an assigned target cell. The BSC selects a target cell based on the MR to ensure that the handover is successful. The forced cell handover is used to switch the subscribers in a cell to another cell before the BTS maintenance to ensure that no call drops occur during the BTS maintenance. O&M of BT O&M of BT involves the following operations: query of BT attribute, reset in levels for BT, query and change of BT administrative state, and BT test. O&M of CH Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


75


1 Basic Features

O&M of CH involves the following operations: query of CH attribute, query and change of CH administrative state, forced CH handover, and related O&M of CH. O&M of RC O&M of RC involves the following operations: O&M of TRX administrative state, query of TRX attributes, and automatic frequency calibration. O&M of BTS involves also board-specific operations such as query, maintenance, and reset of the BTS boards. You can select specific boards on the O&M system to query information such as the software and hardware information, extended power information. In addition, you can reset boards and query board alarms on the O&M system. For certain boards, you can also set the clock. By checking the operating status displayed on the LMT, you can be fully aware of the state of the BTS. All O&M functions can be implemented at either the remote end or local end, facilitating the use and query. The general maintenance or operation of the logical object can be performed at the remote end. In the case of hardware replacement, all O&M can be performed at the local end.

Enhancement 

GBSS8.1 Flexible OML configuration: In the case of fixed OML configuration, the OML must be configured on timeslot 31 of E1 or timeslot 24 of T1. Any timeslot other than timeslot 31 on the E1 of the upper-layer BTS is allocated to the OML of the lower-level BTSs. This type of configuration meets the requirement in most cases but not in the case of swapping. The OML cannot be configured for the BTS in the case of swapping where the OML of the new BTS should be configured on the same timeslot as the existing transmission devices. This problem can be solved by the flexible OML configuration. Before putting the BTS into operation, configure the data on the BSC side to reserve the E1 timeslots to be used by other transmission devices. During the configuration of OML for the BTS, the OMLs of the BTS and its lower-level BTSs are configured on the timeslots other than those reserved ones. In this way, the normal operation of the BTS and other transmission devices is ensured.



GBSS13.0 IP transmission of the monitoring device: The BTS may be connected to external monitoring device from customers. The monitoring device supports IP transmission. In this version, vacant FE electrical port or electrical port of the BTS is connected to the IP port of the monitoring device, providing data routing and forwarding functions for the monitoring device. The monitoring data is reported to the PC or other maintenance terminals through the transmission network for analysis of the monitoring information. The BTS only provides the routing and forwarding functions and does not support the analysis of monitoring information of customers. Only the BTS3900/A/L/DBS3900 (GTMUb) and BTS3012 series BTSs support this function.



GBSS14.0 Cloud BB CPRI O&M capability improvement: This function allows users to perform CPRI BER test and query the information about optical modules on the U2000. This improves the CPRI maintainability. To query information about optical modules between the BBU and RRUs, right-click a BBU or RRU and choose Display SFP Module Information from the shortcut menu. Then, the U2000 sends an MML command for querying the optical module information

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


76


1 Basic Features

to the NEs, and the NEs respond with query results in MML messages. The U2000 displays these results in a list. The results include the optical module type, wavelength, power, and port rate. When users identify CPRI faults, they can start monitoring CPRI BER on any section of CPRI cables to the BTS in the Signaling Trace Management window. The U2000 dynamically displays the test result in curves. This helps users remotely locate CPRI faults.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA



GBTS(GTMU) Hardware The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012, BTS3012AE, and BTS3900B do not support flexible OML configuration and IP transmission and IP transmission for monitoring devices. The BTS3900E does not support IP transmission for monitoring devices. IP transmission for monitoring devices requires a GTMUb board.



GBTS(UMPT) Hardware GBTS(UMPT) does not support the flexible OML configuration.



MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.6.9 GBFD-111203 O&M of BSC Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary Users access the NE using the LMT or U2000 to perform routine maintenance and operation such as data configuration, alarm management, security management, performance data collection and analysis, and loading and upgrading so that the NE functions properly.

Benefits This feature provides the following benefits:

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


77


1 Basic Features



Users can add, delete, modify, query the configured data, and perform various maintenance operations for the NE so that the NE can provide services as required.



Users can monitor and learn about the operating status of the NE in real time to promptly locate and rectify the fault.



Users can upgrade the NE at either the local end or the remote end.

Description The graphical interface makes the O&M of BSC easy to understand and easy to use. The O&M of BSC mainly provides the following functions: 

Configuration management The data configuration of the BSC and the BTS under the control of this BSC is managed. The data configuration for the BSC can be performed on the LMT either online or offline.



Software management As an important function of the O&M system, software management involves operations such as loading, management, and activation. The management objects include software of each board, software patch, license, and BOOTROM. The operations of these four types of software facilitate convenient and proper management of BSC software.



O&M of board O&M of board involves the reset and switchover of boards, the monitoring of CPU and DSP, and the reset of subracks or the system. Users perform different operations to solve the problems or maintain the system in different situations.



System monitoring System monitoring involves monitoring and offline browsing of the CPU/DSP usage. A maximum of four objects can be monitored in a task. Multiple monitoring tasks can be performed at the same time. Monitoring of the CPU/DSP usage enables the users to learn about the system load in real time.



Query of call resources Based on the anonymous IMSI or other information of a subscriber provided by the maintenance personnel, the system queries all the resources the subscriber uses in the GBSS. These resources include the BTS, sector, TRX, circuits on the Abis interface, Ater interface information about the BSC, A interface information, TC resources, and board information. All the information helps maintenance personnel quickly locate problems and faults.



Maintenance of interface and link Maintenance of interface and link involves the management of LAPD link, SS7 link, and the trunk circuit on each interface. For example, query of the status of the LAPD link, SS7 link, and trunk circuit, changing the status of trunk circuit, blocking and unblocking of the LAPD link and SS7 link.



Time synchronization Huawei BSC implements the time synchronization with the upper-level NMS through BAM to complete the synchronization of all NEs managed by a centralized NMS. The BAM distributes the synchronized clock to all the BSC boards to synchronize all the elements of the system. By using powerful maintenance functions, the maintenance personnel can quickly get familiar with the BSC LMT and master the usage of Huawei equipment to maintain Huawei GBSS in a simple and efficient way.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


78


1 Basic Features

Enhancement 

GBSS7.0 E1/T1 transmission BER detection: You can obtain the information on the E1/T1 transmission quality on the maintenance system. The following information can be viewed: BER, errored second (ES), errored second ratio (ESR), severely errored second ratio (SESR), number of frames failed in CRC, and number of synchronization bit check errors. The information provides the maintenance personnel with a visualized view of the transmission quality. E1/T1 transmission BER detection complies with G.821 specifications. Operation log reported to the centralized NMS: The BSC supports the query and export of operation logs by time. The exported logs are saved in .xml format. The BSC compresses the operation logs and uploads them to the centralized NMS by time or by file size. The centralized NMS can translate the operation logs in .xml format. It also supports the query by time.



GBSS8.0 The O&M of the built-in PCU is supported.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.6.10 GBFD-111207 BTS Test Function Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


79


1 Basic Features

Summary BTS test involves site test, baseband test, baseband idle timeslot test, TCH loopback test, transmission performance test, and cyclic redundancy check (CRC).

Benefits One of the major problems faced by all operators is quick and easy location of the cause and faulty module of the BTS problems. The OMC at the remote end and local end provided by Huawei GBSS enables the BTS test and also the centralized and remote BTS test. This facilitates the commissioning at the local end during installation and also the centralized management through the NMS and the OMC remotely during the O&M process. Huawei GBSS BTS test feature provides the following benefits: 

Flexible operations are supported. Operators can perform the O&M at either the local end or remote end as required by the engineering or O&M.



Compared with fault management at separated sites, the BTS O&M system provided by Huawei GBSS reduces the manual operations and the O&M expenditure because Huawei GBSS supports the centralized management for BTSs under one BSC.



Various test functions help the maintenance personnel to locate the fault and identify the faulty module without the use of test devices. This enables the automatic problem detection and therefore saves the maintenance expenditure.

Description Site test: In the site test, the board hardware is tested. The boards can be TMU board, TRX, and CDU. The hardware test enables early detection and recovery of hardware failure. Baseband test: Baseband test involves BIU loopback test and TRX self-test. In BIU loopback test, the transmission of the TRX signaling channel on the BTS DBUS is tested. The TRX sends the signaling channel data to the signaling channel of the BTS DBUS. After the loopback through the TMU, the TRX receives the data sent by the TRX itself. The TRX compares the data with the original data, and then reports the BER to obtain the link quality of the signaling channel on the BTS DBUS. In TRX self-test, the running status of the TRX is tested. Baseband idle timeslot test: During network optimization, you must manually set the network to maximum interference mode to obtain the maximum interference of the entire network. This is achieved by sending the dummy burst on all idle timeslots of a specific area. In the test start command, set the test time to 1 to 24 hours. The test can be stopped automatically by software or stopped manually on the LMT. TCH loopback test: TCH loopback test involves BIU loopback test and TRX RF self-loop test. In the BIU loopback test, the transmission of the TRX TCH on the BTS DBUS is tested. The TRX sends the TCH data to the traffic channel of the BTS DBUS. After the loopback through the TMU, the TRX receives the data sent by the TRX itself. The TRX compares the data with the original data, and then reports the BER to obtain the link quality of the TCH on the BTS DBUS. In the TRX RF self-loop test, the quality of the RX channel and TX channel of the TRX is tested. TRX RF self-test is carried out by the digital signal processing unit in the TRX. Through the baseband processing unit and the loopback of the RF unit, the data is transmitted through baseband processing unit again and returned to the digital signal processing unit. The digital signal processing unit compares the data with the original data and reports the BER to obtain the quality information regarding the TX and RX channels.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


80


1 Basic Features

Transmission performance test: The transmission performance of the E1 port specified by the BTS. The transmission performance information regarding a specified TMU board can be learned quickly through the E1 loopback test. Two types of loopback modes are available: E1 loopback and timeslot loopback. When E1 loopback is selected, all the timeslots of a specified E1 port are tested. When timeslot loopback is selected, the number of the timeslot should be specified. One timeslot can be tested in one test. CRC: Operators can decide whether to adopt CRC for the transmission between the BTS and the BSC.

Enhancement 

GBSS7.0 BTS antenna system connection detection: This feature is performed for the deployment and cutover of the BTS and for the troubleshooting of the BTS antenna system. The feature involves the call test and co-frequency and adjacent frequency check. Call test: You can enable the call of a specified MS to traverse handovers on the channels in a cell on the Site Maintenance System and the BSC host. Therefore, the BTS can test the channels and then report the test result to the Site Maintenance System through the BSC. The test result is saved as a file for the analysis by tools. The following issues can be tested: incorrect connection of the antenna system, main and diversity problems, uplink and downlink balance, one-way audio, and no audio. Co-frequency and adjacent frequency check under one BTS: This function is performed during data configuration to provide accurate information to operators. This helps to avoid the configuration of the same frequency and adjacent frequencies for one BTS especially for one cell due to improper operation. Such configuration may cause intranetwork interference, but if the configuration is confirmed by the operator, it can be issued.



GBSS8.1 Voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR) detection: In the early stage of the network deployment, VSWR is a key item in the acceptance test. A specialized test tool is required to measure the VSWR on site and to verify the installation of the antenna system. The VSWR detection function controls the test of the BTS remotely without using any specialized tools, and therefore reduces the cost because the maintenance personnel do not need to conduct the test on site. Maintenance engineers start the VSWR detection on the U2000 or LMT. The BTS then configures the test mode, conducts the VSWR test, and restores to the working mode. On the U2000, you can perform VSWR tests in batches and set the VSWR threshold. The precision of the reported VSWR is 0.01 with a deviation more than ±0.2 in comparison with the VSWR obtained by using a specialized tool.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA



GBTS(GTMU) Hardware The BTS3900B does not support VSWR detection.




Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


81




1 Basic Features

MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.6.11 GBFD-111210 Integrated Network Management Interface Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary GBSS products access Huawei mobile integrated network management system U2000 through the integrated network management interface.

Benefits The U2000 is located in the element management-layer (EM-layer) of the telecommunication management network (TMN) model. It provides a network management interface for the upper-level network management system (NMS). This feature provides the following benefits: 

The integrated operation and maintenance of the GBSS can be implemented on the U2000.



The upper-level NMS or the NMS of other vendors can be accessed on the northbound interface provided by the U2000.

Description The U2000 is an integrated management system on NE level. It supports the integrated operation and maintenance of mobile devices. With flexible access modes, the remote network element devices can access the U2000 through the wide area network (WAN). The LMT can be placed anywhere on the network. In normal communications, the centralized maintenance is performed; when the communication with the U2000 is interrupted, the local maintenance is initiated. In addition, the U2000 provides the northbound interface to access the upper-level network management system or the network management system of other vendors. The GBSS accesses the U2000 on the integrated network management interface of the LMT. In addition, users can implement functions such as software management, configuration, maintenance, alarm management, performance statistics, and security management on the integrated network management interface. Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


82


1 Basic Features

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA










1.6.12 GBFD-116501 Man Machine Language (MML) Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS7.0.

Summary The BSS supports NE operation and maintenance by using MML commands.

Benefits MML stands for man machine language. In the daily operation and maintenance, compared with GUI, MML is more effective and supports the scripts. This feature provides the following benefits: 

Supporting the maintenance of the BSS by using MML commands



Maintaining one or more NEs by using MML scripts

Description The BSS supports NE operation and maintenance by running MML commands on the U2000 or LMT. Compared with GUI, MML is more effective. You can configure and maintain multiple NEs by running MML scripts or performing multiple operations on one NE. MML Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


83


1 Basic Features

improves maintenance efficiency, reduces improper manual operations, and greatly reduces O&M cost of operators. 

The MML command supports the following operation modes:

1.

Entering MML commands and parameters directly.

2.

Entering MML commands and parameters on the GUI.

3.

Providing the MML batch processing function. Many MML commands are written in a file. The LMT reads the MML commands in the file and executes these commands automatically.

4.

Instant and timed batch processing.

5.

Recording the MML commands and saving the results of the execution of the MML commands automatically.

6.

Recording operations in the operation logs.

7.

MML pre-activation.



The MML command supports the following operation modes:

1.

Configuring data, including the BTS data using the MML commands.

2.

Performing alarm maintenance functions such as browsing, querying, and manually recovering alarms, configuring environment alarms, and shielding alarms using MML commands.

3.

Maintaining BSC devices, transmission devices, signaling links, and interfaces. That is, using the MML commands, you can maintain the BSC and transmission devices, such as status query and board switchover.

4.

Maintaining BTS boards and TRXs.

5.

Collecting data files (including logs, performance files, and alarm files) to the LMT.

6.

Performing security management functions such as adding, deleting, and modifying user information, managing rights of the users, and querying operation logs.

7.

Performing software management functions such as upgrading the BSC software, BTS software, patches, and maintaining the BIOS and license.

8.

Performing other functions such as setting time and DST.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


84


1 Basic Features

NA 

Other NEs NA







1.6.13 GBFD-116402 Maintenance Mode Alarm Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.1.

Summary This feature distinguishes the maintenance mode alarms from the common alarms to avoid the impact of the maintenance mode alarms on the common alarms.

Benefits This feature prevents sudden increase in the number of alarms during engineering operations such as network upgrade and maintenance, improving the network maintenance efficiency.

Description With the network operation and development, the engineering operations such as network upgrade, capacity expansion, and commissioning of the BSS system are inevitable. Therefore, a large number of maintenance mode alarms are generated because of the temporary state of the engineering operations. If these alarms are not separated from the common alarms, the common alarms generated by the BTS/BSC are masked. This greatly affects the operators' normal monitoring of the network. This feature distinguishes the maintenance mode alarms from the common alarms. By setting the engineering object before engineering operations, the EMS/NMS system can distinguish the maintenance mode alarms from the common alarms. In addition, the EMS/NMS system can configure the receiving strategy of the maintenance mode alarms and filter out the maintenance mode alarms, reducing the impact of the maintenance mode alarms on the system load. This feature supports configuration of the BTS or the BSC as the engineering object. When the BTS is configured as the engineering object, all the related device alarms, service alarms, and transmission alarms are maintenance mode alarms. When the BSC is configured as the engineering object, all the BSC alarms and the alarms about the BTSs managed by the BSC are maintenance mode alarms. The duration of the maintenance mode alarm can be set. The engineering object is restored to non-engineering object after the set duration. The alarms generated by the non-engineering object are viewed as common alarms.

Enhancement None

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


85


1 Basic Features

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs The following U2000 feature must be activated: WOFD-014300 Maintenance Mode Management







1.6.14 GBFD-113523 NAT Beside OM Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.1.

Summary With this feature, the network address translation (NAT) firewall is deployed on the LMT side and the U2000 side to maintain the network security without affecting the normal connections between devices.

Benefits Firewall is a basic technology to maintain the network security. The NAT firewall protects the internal network by hiding the internal network address using the NAT technology. Therefore, the network security is enhanced. According to the actual requirements, the customer can deploy the NAT firewall as follows: Deploy the NAT firewall on the U2000 to prevent the attack from the network. Deploy the NAT firewall on the LMT so that multiple LMTs on the same network segment are connected to the GBSC by using the same IP address, saving the public network IP resources.

Description To ensure the GBSS network security, the NAT firewall needs to be deployed between the GBSC and the LMT or the U2000. The NAT technology converts the IP address in the IP Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


86


1 Basic Features

header to another IP address. Through the NAT firewall, the IP address and port number in the IP packet of the network device are changed. The GBSC is interconnected to the LMT and the U2000. When one side initiates the connection, the other side cannot be properly connected because the new IP address and port number of the other side are inaccessible. The NAT beside OM feature supports the deployment of the NAT firewall on the U2000 and the LMT but not on the GBSC. After starting the NAT firewall, configure the GBSC as the server and the U2000 and the LMT as the clients. Then, initiate the connections from the U2000 and the LMT to the GBSC. In this manner, the GBSC can be connected properly because the IP address of the GBSC is not converted by using the NAT technology.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.7 Software Management 1.7.1 MRFD-210401 BSC/RNC Software Management Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


87


1 Basic Features

Summary This feature provides functions of software installation, software upgrade, and patch installation of the MBSC. This facilitates the remote management of the MBSC software.

Benefits This feature provides functions of software installation, software upgrade, and patch installation of the MBSC, reducing the O&M cost for operators.

Description The MBSC supports the software management. This feature facilitates the remote management of the MBSC software. The operators can run the MML commands to: 

Query the information about the software version and other information about the running system.



Upload, download, and activate the program file, patch file, and license file, and copy the data files and log files to the FTP server.



Use the BAM server of the MBSC as the FTP server and transmit files such as program file and patch file by using the wildcard between the FTP server and the FTP client.



Perform the remote patch upgrade of the BAM server of the MBSC.



Use the MBSC as the transmission medium to transmit files between the U2000 and the MBTS.

In addition, the operators can control the product software at the operation and maintenance center (OMC), including the program, patch, license, data, and log. The OMC can identify and match the product software version. In this way, the efficiency of product upgrade and data downloading is improved.

Enhancement 

GBSS8.1 Supports the remote upgrade of the BSC and BTS software.



GBSS13.0 Software digital signature of the controller: The integrity and correctness of the software are ensured by using the software digital signature solution. The software digital signature is a solution where digital signature is added to the software and the information containing the digital signature is compressed into the software package before the product software is released. When the U2000 delivers the software to NEs or the software is directly loaded to NEs, it verifies the digital signature. The software package is considered as integrate, reliable, and usable only after it passes the verification. Otherwise, the software package is considered as illegal.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA




Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


88




1 Basic Features




MS NA



CN NA










1.7.2 MRFD-210402 BTS/NodeB Software Management Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Summary This feature enables the operator to remotely manage the software installation and upgrade of the MBTS. This feature supports enhanced functions such as automatic change of the signaling bandwidth, software downloading based on the configuration, software downloading resumption, downloading and activation of software in batches, and hot patching.

Benefits This feature provides efficient and accurate software installation, software upgrade, and software version management.

Description This feature helps the operator to remotely manage the MBTS software. The operator can perform the following operations using MML commands: 

Efficient and correct installation and upgrade of the software



Check on compatibility of the software and hardware versions to ensure successful software installation and upgrade



Version management, for example, the hardware and software version query



Automatic data conversion during the software upgrade

The process of upgrading the software of the network element is as follows: 

Download the software package from the OMC U2000 to the MBTS using the OMCH.



Run the software activation command on the OMC U2000 client.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


89




1 Basic Features

The MBTS automatically loads the software to the corresponding board and switches over the active and standby directories on the MBTS.

The following are the enhancement features of the MBTS software management: 

UBR/UBR+ is supported on the OMCH. When the traffic is heavy, the OMCH rate is fixed at 64 kbit/s. When the traffic is light, the OMCH bandwidth is automatically increased to increase the software downloading efficiency.



Software downloading based on the configuration can reduce 30% of the software package and shorten the downloading time. When a board is added, the system supports only the software downloading for the corresponding board to improve the downloading efficiency.



If the network recovers in 24 hours after the network breakdown, the system supports software downloading resumption to avoid that the software is downloaded repeatedly.



A maximum of 500 MBTSs can be selected to download and activate the software in batches automatically. The default value is 50 MBTSs in one batch.



Hot patching without resetting the MBTS is supported to minimize the negative impact on the traffic.

Enhancement 

GBSS9.0 The hot patching is introduced that BTS do not need to restart.



GBSS12.0 Remote Loading Speed Improvement of BTS Software: The speed of BTS/NodeB software remote loading is increased. The time required for software loading is shortened to 15 to 20 minutes for one BTS.



GBSS13.0 GBSS integrity check: This function ensures the software accuracy and integrity using the software digital signature scheme. With this function, the MBTS checks and verifies the digital signature when loading the software. If the verification passes, the MBTS regards that the software package is complete and reliable. If the verification fails, the MBTS regards that the software package is invalid.



GBSS14.0 The BTS3900E and BTS3900B support the GBSS integrity check function.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA






GBTS(UMPT) Hardware GBTS(UMPT) does not support the remote loading speed improvement of BTS software.



MS NA

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


90




1 Basic Features

CN NA










1.7.3 GBFD-111213 Remote Upgrade of the BSC&BTS Software Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.1.

Summary Remote upgrade of the BSC&BTS software involves the remote upgrade of the BSC and BTS software.


This feature is especially applicable to the system upgrade in the rural area. Multiple network elements can be upgraded simultaneously without local operation, improving the working efficiency of the maintenance personnel.



The upgrade of the GBSS can be remotely implemented on the U2000. As this feature supports batch upgrade of multiple network elements, this can save the time and workload of the maintenance personnel, and reduce the time of the service disruption caused by the system upgrade.



The remote software upgrade can be implemented on the GUI of the U2000 for ease of operation.

Description Remote upgrade of the BSC&BTS software involves the remote upgrade of the BSC and BTS software, and the automatic remote upgrade of the LMT. 

Remote upgrade of the BSC software Huawei BSS supports remote upgrade of the host software and OMU software of the BSC on the integrated network management system (U2000). The remote upgrade of the BSC software provides downloading, uploading, and activation of the BSC host software and OMU software. In case the upgrade fails, this function also enables the rollback of the BSC software version and data configuration. After the software is loaded successfully, the system automatically loads and activates the license file. The remote upgrade also supports the upgrade of the cold patches and hot patches.



Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Remote upgrade of the BTS software


91


1 Basic Features

The remote upgrade of the BTS software involves three steps: downloading the BTS software to the BSC from the U2000, loading the BTS software to the BTS boards through the BSC, and activating the BTS software of the BTS boards through the BSC. After the BTS software is downloaded to the BSC on the U2000, both the one-key upgrade and the automatic upgrade are supported. In the case of one-key upgrade, the maintenance personnel load and activate the BTS software on the U2000. In the case of automatic upgrade, the maintenance personnel configure the information about the BTS software version to be upgraded and then the BSC automatically upgrades the BTS software without manual intervention. 

Automatic LMT remote upgrade LMT is the GUI-based maintenance terminal of the GBSC. The LMT version must match the GBSC version. To simplify the maintenance, the GBSC downloads the corresponding LMT version on the U2000 during the GBSC software upgrade. The LMT is then installed automatically and restarted. If the LMT automatic installation fails, the LMT is rolled back to the previous version. To avoid downloading the LMT installation package for each upgrade, you can download the patch package and install only the updated part.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA










1.7.4 MRFD-210403 License Management Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0. Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


92


1 Basic Features

Summary This feature involves the MBSC license control and MBTS license control.

Benefits With this feature, the operators can purchase the license based on the network development, reducing the initial cost of the network deployment.

Description The license file is used to determine whether the optional features are available and how many optional features are available. If a BSC is configured with only GBTS(GTMU), the BSC and all BTSs share one BSC license file. The BSC uniformly assigns the license to all BTSs under the BSC. If a BSC is configured with only GBTS(UMPT), all GBTS(UMPT) under the BSC share one GBTS(UMPT) license file. The BSC assigns itself a BSC license. The U2000 assigns the GBTS(UMPT) license to all GBTS(UMPT) under the BSC. If a BSC is configured with both GBTS(GTMU) and GBTS(UMPT), all GBTS(GTMU) and GBTS(UMPT) under the BSC share one GBTS(UMPT) license file. The U2000 assigns the license to all GBTS(UMPT) under the BSC and assigns the license residual to the BSC. Then, the BSC assigns itself the license and assigns the license residual to all GBTS(GTMU) under the BSC. The operators can manage and query the contents in the license file using the LMT or the U2000 client. The characteristics of the MBSC license management are as follows: 

The license file is downloaded from the U2000 and is controlled and activated on the MBSC side.



The license can be used within one MBSC but not between the MBSCs. The characteristics of the GBTS(UMPT) license management are as follows:



The U2000 assigns the GBTS(UMPT) license to all GBTS(UMPT) after the GBTS(UMPT) license file is loaded onto the U2000. When a BSC is configured with both GBTS(GTMU) and GBTS(UMPT), some license control items need to be allocated to the BSC for GBTS management.



GBTS(UMPT) license information can be distributed only between GBTS(UMPT) under one BSC.

The characteristics of the NodeB license management are as follows: 

All the NodeBs under one RNC share one license file. That is, one RNS corresponds to one license file. Each license file records the license information about all NodeBs in the RNS.



The license is distributed on the U2000 and is controlled by the NodeB. The distribution results are sent to the NodeB from the U2000.



The license information can be distributed between NodeBs but not between RNCs. The total number of a control item cannot exceed the number recorded in the license file.

New or upgraded license files can be ordered from Huawei.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


93


1 Basic Features

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA










1.8 GBSS Network Architecture 1.8.1 GBFD-114601 Multi-Cell Function Availability This feature was available from GBSS6.1.

Summary When this feature is enabled, one BTS can be configured with up to 12 cells.

Benefits This feature meets the requirement for special networking and saves the investment of operators.

Description In some special scenarios, one BTS is required to support more than three cells. In the GSM900/DCS1800 dual-band networking, the following configurations are required: Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


94


1 Basic Features

GSM900 Sx/x/x and DCS1800 Sy/y/y. In this case, one BTS should be configured with six cells. In Huawei GBSS, one BTS supports up to 12 cells and meets the requirements of special networking scenarios, especially the dual-band networking. This saves the investment of operators.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.8.2 GBFD-111501 BTS Combined Cabinet Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary With BTS combined cabinets, the capacity of the BTS site is greatly increased.

Benefits The high-capacity sites can reduce the construction cost of the equipment rooms for operators. Therefore, the deployment of large sites in urban areas helps to reduce the number of sites, increase the network capacity, and save the construction cost.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


95


1 Basic Features

Description The number of TRXs available in one BTS cabinet is limited; therefore, if the number of TRXs required by the synchronous cells is greater than one BTS cabinet can handle, then the combined cabinets should be used. A maximum of two BTS cabinets can be combined into a cabinet group. With the high-capacity sites, operators can reduce the construction cost of the equipment rooms. Therefore, the deployment of large sites in urban areas helps to reduce the number of sites, increase the network capacity, and save the construction cost. In combined cabinets, the cabinet configured with the main control unit is the basic cabinet and the cabinet not configured with the main control unit is the extension cabinet. The basic cabinet and extension cabinet share the common boards. The clock signals, data, O&M signals are transmitted from the basic cabinet to the extension cabinet through certain cabling. The capability of combined cabinets supported by the BTS is as follows: The BTS312 and BTS3012 support the combination of two cabinets while the BTS3006C and BTS3002E support the combination of three cabinets. The BTS3002C, BTS3012II, and BTS3012AE do not support the combination of cabinets. For the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and DBS3900, one BBU supports the maximum cell configuration of S12/12/12.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA



GBTS(GTMU) Hardware The DBS3900, BTS3900, BTS3900A, BTS3900L, BTS3900ALand BTS3900B do not support this feature.






MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


96


1 Basic Features

1.8.3 GBFD-111502 BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary With BTS hybrid cabinet group, the capacity of the BTS site is greatly increased.

Benefits The BTS hybrid cabinet group feature increases the capacity of the current network and facilitates the smooth network upgrade for improved network performance and increased functions.

Description Regardless of the number of cabinets that constitute the cabinet group, one cabinet group supports a maximum of 24 TRXs. If the number of TRXs in a synchronous cell exceeds 24, then multiple cabinet groups should be combined. Generally, this is used for capacity expansion. The cabinets that constitute the cabinet group can be of the same type or of different types. The total number of TRXs in a cabinet group of a synchronous site cannot exceed 72. The cabinet group that provides the clock sources for the cells is called the basic cabinet group, which is configured with one or two TMU boards; the other cabinet groups are called extension cabinet groups. The basic cabinet in a cabinet group can be configured with one TMU board. The E1 cables connect the TMU boards of the basic cabinets. The clock signals and O&M signaling between the cabinet groups are transmitted over the cabling between the basic cabinet of the basic cabinet group and the basic cabinet of an extension cabinet, and then the clock signals and O&M signaling are transmitted from the basic cabinet of a cabinet group to the extension cabinet of the cabinet group. The capability of cabinet groups supported by the BTS is as follows: Cabinet group of the same cabinet type: The BTS312 and BTS3012 support three cabinet groups, each with two combined cabinets, enabling an S24/24/24 synchronous site. The BTS3012II supports the grouping of three cabinets, enabling an S18/18/18 synchronous site. The BTS3012AE supports the grouping of three cabinets, enabling an S12/12/12 synchronous site. The BTS3006C supports two cabinet groups, each with three combined cabinets, enabling an S12/12/12 synchronous site. The BTS3002E supports two cabinet groups, each with three combined cabinets, enabling an S4/4/4 synchronous site. The cabinet group is not applicable to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and DBS3900. Cabinet group of different cabinet types: The BTS3012 can be grouped with the BTS312 and BTS30. Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


97


1 Basic Features

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA



GBTS(GTMU) Hardware The DBS3900, BTS3900, BTS3900A, BTS3900L, BTS3900AL, BTS3900E, and BTS3900B do not support this feature.






MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.8.4 GBFD-118801 BSC Cabinet/Subrack Sharing Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS7.0.

Summary Based on the Platform of Advanced Radio Controller (PARC), BSC cabinet/subrack sharing enables the BSC, TC, PCU, and MGW to share one cabinet.

Benefits Currently, operators become more and more concerned about the cost, so the reduction of equipment construction and maintenance costs becomes increasingly important. This feature enables operators to reduce the cost from the following aspects and to realize smooth evolution from 2G network to 3G network. 

The shared-cabinet technique helps to achieve network integration, save the equipment floor space, and reduce the O&M cost.



Multiple equipment that share one cabinet can unify the maintenance for 2G and 3G networks, the access and core networks. Then, the O&M cost is reduced.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


98


1 Basic Features

Description Cabinet sharing among the BSC, TC, and MGW: Huawei BSC allows the BSC, TC, and MGW to share one cabinet for reducing space and cost. Huawei softswitch products include the MSC server (MSS) and MGW. The MSC server is responsible for call control and signaling, and the MGW is responsible for switching and service bearing. The equipment can be deployed in a distributed way: The MSC server is deployed in the center of a big city and the MGW is deployed in a place close to the access network. With this optimized networking configuration, the calling party and called party are controlled by the same MGW and the voice data is only switched in the MGW instead of the MSC server, saving transmission resources.

Enhancement 

GBSS8.0 Subrack sharing among the BSC, TC, and PCU: Huawei BSC allows the BSC, TC, and PCU to share one subrack. One subrack can provide CS services and PS services. Then, one cabinet can provide CS services and PS services for 2,048 TRXs. Therefore, the system integration is greatly improved and the space and O&M cost are reduced.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.8.5 MRFD-210204 Star Topology Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


99


1 Basic Features

Summary With this feature, each MBTS is directly connected to the MBSC through the transmission link.

Benefits Star topology is a traditional networking scheme. The network architecture is simple and the link reliability is high. Therefore, the maintenance cost is reduced.

Description The star topology applies to urban areas, especially densely populated areas. In star topology, each MBTS is directly connected to the MBSC through the transmission link. The MBTSs are mutually independent. Therefore, the network architecture is simple. This topology usually applies to sites in large configuration.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.8.6 MRFD-210205 Chain Topology Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


100


1 Basic Features

Summary With this feature, the MBTSs can be connected in chain topology.

Benefits Chain topology is a traditional networking scheme. With this feature, the timeslot switching function of the MBTS enables the timeslots of an MBTS to be shared with the lower-level MBTSs for transmission. Therefore, the transmission cost and investment on the timeslot switching device are saved.

Description The chain topology is used along the highways or railway tracks and in sparsely populated areas. It can greatly save the transmission resources. In some cases, multiple E1 links can be used for transmission in chain topology. The levels of MBTSs in chain topology should not exceed five.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA



GBTS(GTMU) Hardware The BTS3900B does not support this feature.






MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA






Mutually Exclusive Features −

GBFD-118601 Abis over IP

1.8.7 MRFD-210206 Tree Topology Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


101


1 Basic Features

Summary With this feature, the MBTSs can be connected in tree topology.

Benefits Tree topology is a traditional networking scheme and applies to the microwave transmission network. With this feature, the timeslot switching function of the MBTS enables the timeslots of an MBTS to be shared with the lower-level MBTSs for transmission. Therefore, the transmission cost and investment on the timeslot switching device are saved.

Description The tree topology is used in the large and sparsely populated areas. The tree topology has a lower demand for the transmission cables than the star topology. The transmission reliability, however, is reduced and the construction and maintenance are complicated because signals pass through many nodes. In addition, the fault in one MBTS may affect the normal operation of its lower-level MBTSs. The tree topology applies to areas in which the subscriber distribution is complicated. In addition, capacity expansion is difficult because it may involve big modification of the network architecture. In tree topology, the MBTS obtains the clock signals by locking to the upper-level network. Each phase-lock can decrease the quality of the clock signals. Therefore, the levels of MBTSs must not exceed five.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA



GBTS(GTMU) Hardware The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature.






MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

GBFD-118601 Abis over IP Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

102


1 Basic Features

1.8.8 GBFD-118621 Connection Inter BSC over IP Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.1.

Summary This feature provides an IP-based connection between BSCs for information exchange.


Provides a direct transmission path between BSCs.



Provides a direct channel to exchange information between BSCs and enables the interBSC soft-synchronized network and IBCA functions.

Description The IP-based inter-BSC connection enables operators to use the IP network to connect the BSCs so that the BSCs can communicate with each other directly. This feature is applicable to the scenarios of inter-BSC information exchange. For example, when the inter-BSC softsynchronized network or the IBCA is enabled, this feature is required. The inter-BSC connection supports only the inter-BSC signaling switching. The CS or PS is not supported. The BSC must be configured with the IP interface board. Huawei IP interface boards support FE and GE interfaces, which support the IPv4 protocol. The BSCs in the same equipment room may be connected through layer 2 switches. The BSCs in different equipment rooms may be connected through layer 3 switches. The interconnection method depends on the local network planning of the BSC.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware An IP interface board is required.












MS NA



CN NA

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


103




1 Basic Features

Other NEs NA







1.9 System Reliability 1.9.1 GBFD-111701 Board Switchover Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary In daily operations, the active board takes charge of the normal operation of the services and the standby one performs real-time backup for the active board. When the active board is faulty, the services are switched to the standby board for continuous operation of the system.

Benefits The reliability of the BSS and the MTBF of the system is greatly improved, and the service disruptions caused by the faults of a board are reduced.

Description To ensure the reliable operation for the system, Huawei GBSS provides redundancy solutions for all the boards (except for the boards designed for the resource pool), that is, the boards are classified into the active board and the standby board. The active board processes services while the standby board performs real-time backup for the active one. If the active board is faulty or needs to be replaced, the services can be switched over to the standby board. In this way, the system can work continuously. There are two kinds of switchovers. One is automatic switchover. That is, the services are automatically switched over from the active board to the standby board. Another one is manual switchover. That is, the maintenance personnel perform the board switchover on the LMT. The maintenance personnel send an immediate switchover command to the system, and a specially designed maintenance module instructs relevant boards to perform switchover. To perform the active/standby switchover successfully, the following conditions must be met: The standby board must be in position and work properly. No major or critical alarm is reported. When the standby board is switched over to the active one, the original active board will reset automatically. If this board starts properly, it will be the standby one. In this way, the boards are kept in backup status. Boards that work in active/standby mode can be switched over. Boards that work in a nonactive/standby mode, such as in independent or resource pool mode, cannot be switched over.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


104


1 Basic Features

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.9.2 GBFD-111705 GSM Flow Control Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary When the system is overloaded, the system reduces the traffic of the access system or disables some maintenance functions according to the priorities. In this way, the normal operation of the main services in the system is ensured, and the normal traffic and load can be restored in a relatively short time.

Benefits This feature ensures the stable and reliable operation of the system.

Description When the system load exceeds the processing capability due to excessive traffic volume or other causes, the BSC initiates the flow control and takes measures for the normal provision of important services. In this way, the system robustness is improved. GBSS flow control involves the internal flow control and traffic flow control. Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


105


1 Basic Features

The internal flow control prevents load increase caused by O&M or restricts some supporting functions when the traffic is relatively high. This protects the system against breakdown and ensures the successful access of user services. Service flow control restricts some common services to ensure the provision of key services when the traffic exceeds certain level. In this way, the system load can be restored to normal quickly. When the network sends many paging messages or many MSs access the network at the same time, the services may not be processed in time. In this case, the system may discard some paging messages or reject some access requests, so that the traffic can be controlled within a defined range. In terms of the service design, the system performs different protections on different levels to maintain the KPIs in the normal state when the traffic is overloaded in some areas caused by the imbalance of the service distribution. In this case, the flow control involves the RSL flow control, flow control of the single BTS, and overload protection of the TRX. By using flow control algorithms of different levels, the system automatically provides the flow control protection after the services exceed the system specifications, and takes measures to stabilize the system load, maintaining the user service within the range allowed by the system and ensuring the robustness of the system to prevent the breakdown caused by the overload. In addition, the system can automatically change the restriction measures according to the decrease in the load. In this way, the system load can be restored to normal quickly.

Enhancement 

GBSS9.0 Flow control for A interface boards is added to prevent board resets. Main processing unit (MPU) flow control and backpressure are also added. If signaling is configured for one A interface board, the processing capability of the CPU on that board becomes insufficient and therefore the system capacity is limited. PS paging flow control is added and the PS paging priority is decreased. Flow control for PIU interface boards is added.



GBSS14.0 Flow control for signaling over the A interface is added. If the signaling links over the A interface are congested or the processing capability of the CN is insufficient, the BSC restricts the traffic access volume to meet the signaling processing capability of the A interface. This prevents severe signaling congestion over the A interface and therefore increases the valid traffic volume. The emergency call preemption function is added. When transmission resources are insufficient, emergency calls are allowed to preempt transmission resources occupied by common calls. This ensures that emergency calls can be successfully set up.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA







Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


106




1 Basic Features

MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.9.3 GBFD-112301 Remote EAC Maintenance Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary This feature supports the remote EAC maintenance.


Improves the maintenance efficiency



Reduces the O&M cost for the operators

Description The remote EAC maintenance feature allows the users to query data, set parameters, and run commands on the BTS environment monitor device on the LMT. After the EAC is configured, 32-channel Boolean value input/digital value input, 8-channel digital value output, and 8-channel analog input are supported. The burglar alarm, temperature alarm, humidity alarm, fire alarm, and other alarms are also supported. This feature allows the users to query data, set parameters and execute commands on the BTS environment monitor device on the LMT, including reset and clear the burglar alarm, set the thresholds of the temperature and humidity, set the alarm, and query the temperature or humidity. Once generated, the environment alarm should be reported to the central equipment room, and then the maintenance personnel should be notified for further processing. The EAC can be maintained remotely, improving the maintenance efficiency.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


107




1 Basic Features

BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.9.4 GBFD-111214 Operation & Maintenance System One-Key Recovery Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary This feature supports the quick recovery of the operating system or the configuration data.


Reduces the complexity of the backup and recovery of the operating system or the configuration data of the GOMU or the BAM server.



Reduces the time of the service disruption caused by the operation and maintenance.

Description The O&M system of Huawei BSS includes the GBAM and GOMU. Both adopt the Linux operating system. If the operating system is corrupted, you can run commands to recover the operating system by connecting a PC that supports the boot from CD-ROM to the GOMU or BAM server. The CD-ROM delivered with Huawei equipment contains the initial backup of the system, and operators can restore the BSC to the default state. In addition, operators can back up the BSC operating system or configuration data at any time, and restore the system to the status of the backup time.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


108


1 Basic Features

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.9.5 GBFD-111211 Reporting the Temperature List of the BTS Equipment Room Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS7.0.

Summary This feature supports the temperature monitoring switch of the BTS equipment room, realtime query, and downloading of the temperature information log of the BTS equipment room.

Benefits The temperature of the BTS equipment room affects the ventilation of the BTS equipment room and the power consumption of the air conditioner. In addition, it may cause a fire warning. As the operational expenditure of mobile operators increases, maintaining the functionality and reducing the manpower of the operation and maintenance have become an effective method of reducing the cost. This feature provides the following benefits: 

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

This feature not only reduces the manpower of the O&M and check, but also helps operators monitor the temperature of the BTS equipment room. In addition, the air Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

109


1 Basic Features

conditioner can be remotely adjusted by other ways according to the actual situation. In this way, the energy consumption can be reduced and operators achieve the aim of becoming green operators. 

This feature not only reduces the manpower, but also finds the safety problems in advance such as the abnormal temperature change, fire, and outside damage.

Description This feature can start and stop the detection of the temperature information of the BTS equipment room. The detection of the temperature information of the BTS equipment room is started or stopped on the site maintenance terminal or LMT. Users can set the period of reporting the temperature of the BTS equipment room. A message is displayed on the site maintenance terminal or LMT, indicating whether the reporting of the temperature information of the BTS equipment room is started or stopped successfully. On the U2000 client, you can download the files of the temperature of the equipment room from the OMU in FTP mode. In addition, you can also query the files of the temperature information of the equipment room and save the query results on the client.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs The temperature sensor and EMUA/EMU are required.







Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


110


1 Basic Features

1.9.6 MRFD-210101 System Redundancy Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Summary This feature provides the reliability designs such as the active/standby mode, load sharing, and redundancy configuration, improving the system reliability.

Benefits This feature improves the system stability and therefore ensures the network performance.

Description To ensure the reliable operation of the system, reliability designs such as the active/standby mode, load sharing, and redundancy configuration are widely used in Huawei GBSS/RAN. In resource pool mode, the load sharing is performed among processing units in the pool. The processing unit is not backed up. When one or multiple processing units are faulty, the ongoing services are interrupted, and the new services requests are allocated to other normal processing units in the resource pool. In active/standby mode, the active board processes services while the standby board acts as a backup of the active one. If the active board is faulty or needs to be replaced, the services can be switched over to the standby board. In this way, the system can work continuously. There are two types of switchover. One is automatic switchover. That is, the services are automatically switched over from the active board to the standby board when the active board is faulty. The other one is manual switchover. That is, the maintenance personnel perform the board switchover on the LMT. If the active/standby switchover is allowed, a dedicated maintenance module instructs the relevant boards to perform the switchover after the maintenance engineer sends an immediate switchover command to the system. To perform the active/standby switchover successfully, the following conditions must be met: 

The standby board must be in position and work properly.



No major or critical alarm is reported.

When the standby board is switched over to the active one, the original active board will reset automatically. If this board restarts properly, it becomes the standby one. In this way, the boards still work in active/standby mode. Redundancy configuration consists of the following units: boards, transmission interfaces, power, and fans. The software version and important data configuration file are backed up to ensure that the system works properly even if exception occurs in the file or data. For the BSC6900, the dual-switching system of the control plane and user plane is applied. In addition, the resource pool of control plane and user plane is designed. For the service processing boards, the resource pool is adopted. That is, load-sharing is performed in the resource pool. For other boards, the backup mode is adopted. That is, the boards of the same type in two neighboring slots work in active/standby mode. The resource pool is independently established within the GSM or UMTS.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


111


1 Basic Features

Huawei BTS/NodeB supports the board-level backup. Two boards of the same type work in active/standby mode. When the active board is faulty, an active/standby switchover is performed and the previously standby board works in active mode. For the interface board, the board backup mode is adopted. Some interface boards support the standard backup modes specified in protocols, such as MSP 1+1 or MSP 1:1. When detecting that the board is faulty, the system re-establishes the transmission of the ongoing services on the standby board by adopting an active/standby switchover. When detecting that the active channel is damaged, the system enables the transmission of the ongoing services to recover on the standby channel by adopting an active/standby switchover.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA



GBTS(GTMU) Hardware Only the BTS3012 and BTS3012AE support DTMU redundancy for the BTS system redundancy.






MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.9.7 MRFD-210102 Operate System Security Management Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS7.0 and RAN10.0.

Summary This feature provides the customized security policy and patch management for the operating system on the OMU. Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


112


1 Basic Features

Benefits This feature ensures system reliability and prevents the security threats and attacks on the operating system.

Description This feature provides the customized security policy and patch management for the operating system on the OMU. Customized security management of the operating system: The customized security policy protects the operating system from being attacked and therefore enhances the security of the operating system. This feature can be applied to the Windows 2003 Server and the Linux operating system. The customize security policies are as follows: 

Execution policy

You can execute one or more policies and record the execution results in log files. 

Rollback policy

After executing a security policy, if you want to restore the system to the previous state or customize the policy again, then you can restore the executed policy. 

Generating backup files

You can save the status of a policy into a file. This file can be used as a backup for rollback. 

Saving settings

You can save the current policy settings. 

Exporting settings

You can export the current policy settings to another file. 

Importing settings

You can import the file containing the policy settings into the system. In this way, the system has the same settings. 

Importing the configuration file of the earlier version



You can import the configuration file of the earlier version to the SetWin.



Reloading the configuration file

The SetWin/SetSuse has an inherent configuration file. You can reload this configuration file to the SetWin/SetSuse. Patch management of the operating system: Based on the type of the operating system, you can timely perform the patch compatibility test to ensure that the patch is valid. The patch list corresponding to the operating system is provided at least twice a year.

Enhancement None

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


113


1 Basic Features

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.9.8 MRFD-210103 Link Aggregation Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS9.0 and RAN11.0.

Summary This feature supports the transmission of two combined FEs, improving the reliability of FE transmission and meeting the requirements of higher data flow.

Benefits This feature provides the method for improving the transmission reliability.

Description Huawei GBSS/RAN implements the link aggregation based on IEEE802.3ad, improving the system reliability and providing higher bandwidth. This feature applies to the scenario where high reliability is required, for example, on the ports of the MBSC and the hub NodeB where links are bundled together.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


114


1 Basic Features

Figure 1.1 Networking for Link Aggregation

Enhancement 

GBSS15.0 GBTS(UMPT) can support this feature.

Dependency 







GBTS(GTMU) Hardware The BSC supports this feature, The BTS does not support this feature.






MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs Transmission equipment that connected to the BSC/RNC must support this feature.







1.9.9 MRFD-210104 BSC/RNC Resource Sharing Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS9.0 and RAN10.0.

Summary This feature provides the resource sharing of the user plane and control plane in the MBSC by adopting the intra-subrack/inter-subrack load sharing mechanism of boards.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


115


1 Basic Features

Benefits This feature improves the resource utilization and increases the call success rate. It also maximizes the capacity usage in different traffic modes.

Description The BSC/RNC Resource Sharing feature is classified into user plane resource sharing and control plane resource sharing. Control plane resource sharing applies to CPU usage and memory. When the CPU usage of a certain signaling processing unit is too high or when the memory of a certain signaling process unit is insufficient, the new call is transferred to other signaling processing unit with a low load. User plane resources are shared dynamically within the system based on resource pool and load sharing. If a certain user plane processing unit is overloaded, the new traffic can be allocated to other user plane processing unit with lower load. For the MBSC, the service type-based resource pools are as follows: GSM control plane resource, GSM user plane resource, UMTS control plane resource, and UMTS user plane resource. The resource sharing within the pool is supported, but the resource sharing between pools is not supported.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


116


1 Basic Features

1.9.10 GBFD-117804 Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS9.0.

Summary If a BTS uses an AC power input and the power switch unit (PSU) is faulty, the power amplifiers of some TRXs are shut down to reduce the power demand of the BTS to ensure the normal operation of the BTS.

Benefits This feature ensures that the remaining PSUs are not overloaded and prevents the BTSs being powered off when some PSUs are faulty. Therefore, the BTS can continue to work uninterrupted. This feature can reduce the battery consumption. This feature can avoid the deterioration of the KPIs due to the sudden BTS power failure.

Description When a BTS uses an AC power input, the PSU is needed for the AC/DC conversion. When some PSUs are faulty, the output of the remaining PSUs cannot satisfy the power demand of the BTS. In this case, the overcurrent protection mechanism of the PSU takes effect, which leads to the BTS power failure. In such a case, the BTS shuts down parts of the TRXs to reduce the power demand. To ensure that the normal services are not affected, the BTS calculates the number of TRXs that need to be shut down and then reports the number to the BSC. When the BSC receives the message from the BTS, it stops allocating new calls to the TRXs to be shut down. When no service is carried on the TRX to be shut down, the BTS shuts down the power amplifier of the TRX. After the fault on the PSU is rectified, the BTS restarts the TRXs that are shut down.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA



GBTS(GTMU) Hardware The DBS3900 and BTS3900 support this feature.



GBTS(UMPT) Hardware The DBS3900 and BTS3900 support this feature.



Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

MS Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

117


1 Basic Features

NA 

CN NA



Other NEs The Huawei equipment, such as APM30, is required.







1.9.11 GBFD-511003 Call-Based Flow Control Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS13.0.

Summary In case of emergencies or disasters, congestion occurs. When the traffic load is high, flow control measures will be taken. This feature allows mobile originated calls (MOCs) and mobile terminated calls (MTCs) to be subjected to different flow control policies.

Benefits With this feature, telecom operators can ensure the success rate of MOCs or MTCs by using different flow control policies in the case of emergencies or disasters.

Description In case of emergencies or disasters, the traffic load may become very high as there will usually be a large number of MOCs and MTCs. In such a case, flow control needs to be performed to hold the system load to a proper level. This feature identifies MOCs and MTCs by different flags and protects either MOCs or MTCs from the effects of flow control. It also allows telecom operators to decide whether to discard signaling of MOCs or MTCs using flow control. The precedence of MOCs and MTCs in flow control is customer-definable.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA




Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


118




1 Basic Features




MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA






GBFD-111705 GSM Flow Control


1.9.12 GBFD-113801 TRX Cooperation Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary With this feature, when the BCCH TRX or the TRX involved in baseband FH is faulty, the cell automatically rectifies the faults. Therefore, the services in the cell are not affected before the faulty TRX is replaced.

Benefits The TRX Cooperation feature ensures that the cell provides services continuously. This feature reduces the probability that the cell is out of service because of the faulty BCCH TRX. It also reduces the probability that the call quality in the cell is degraded because of the faulty TRX involved in the baseband FH. Therefore, the reliability of the network is greatly improved.

Description With this feature, when the BCCH TRX or the TRX involved in baseband FH is faulty, the cell automatically rectifies the faults. Therefore, the services in the cell are not affected before the faulty TRX is replaced. Based on the type of faulty TRXs and the handling method, the TRX cooperation is classified into BCCH TRX cooperation and baseband FH TRX cooperation. For the non-baseband FH cell, only the BCCH TRX cooperation occurs. For the baseband FH cell, both BCCH TRX cooperation and baseband FH TRX cooperation are likely to occur. 

BCCH TRX cooperation In the idle state, the MS needs to obtain information through the broadcast messages sent on the BCCH. The messages carry information about cell selection, adjacent cell, access control, dedicated channel control, cell identification code, location, and system parameters related to the PS services. When a BCCH TRX of a cell is faulty, all the services in this cell are interrupted. Therefore, when the BCCH TRX is faulty, another available TRX of the cell is used to substitute the faulty BCCH TRX to ensure that the

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


119


1 Basic Features

cell can continue to provide services. After the fault in the original BCCH TRX is rectified, the BSC can switch the BCCH back to the original TRX. This process is called BCCH TRX cooperation (including the BSC-controlled BCCH TRX cooperation, BSCcollaborated BCCH TRX cooperation, and BTS-controlled BCCH TRX cooperation). 

Baseband FH TRX cooperation In the baseband FH cell, if the TRX involved in baseband FH is faulty, some speech frames in the call using the FH channel are lost. Therefore, the speech quality is degraded. To ensure the speech quality in the cell, the BSC enables the baseband FH TRX cooperation and remove the faulty TRX from the FH and continue the FH mode with the fine running TRX. In this way, the speech quality of the cell is not affected by the faulty TRX. This process is called baseband FH TRX cooperation. When the BCCH TRX in a baseband FH cell is faulty, baseband FH TRX cooperation can also be performed. That is, the cell is changed to the non-FH mode. After all the faults in the original BCCH TRX and in the TRX involved in FH are rectified, the baseband FH TRX cooperation can be performed. That is, the BSC changes the non-FH mode to the FH mode.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA




GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping) and GBFD113702 BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping The baseband FH TRX cooperation function depends on the preceding features.




GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell BTS-controlled BCCH TRX channel cooperation is mutually exclusive with GBFD510104 Multi-site Cell.

−

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing


120


1 Basic Features

GBTS-controlled BCCH TRX channel cooperation is mutually exclusive with GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing. After GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell or GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing is enabled, if a channel on the BCCH TRX becomes faulty, this feature becomes ineffective automatically.

1.10 Basic features 1.10.1 GBFD-110901 Adjustment of Adaptive Timing Advance Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary The BTS informs the MS of the timing advance (TA) value by adopting adaptive rules so that the communication between the BTS and the MS is synchronized.

Benefits This feature is the basis for services between the MS and the BTS such as synchronization and calls. The synchronization of the network can be achieved only after this feature is enabled. Without this feature, all services cannot be properly processed.

Description An interval of three timeslots exists between the TX signals and RX signals of the MS, because the MS sends and receives signals with one frequency synthesizer. After receiving the incoming signals, the MS transmits the outgoing signals at the time delay of three timeslot plus TA value. Therefore, the TA value sent from the BTS to the MS is essential. This ensures that the data from MSs at different distances from the BTS arrives at the BTS in sequence, reducing the interference between signals. This in turn reduces the interference in the entire network. When the MS engaged in a call approaches the BTS or moves away from the BTS, the information that is sent on a timeslot by the MS to the BTS overlaps with the information of another call received on the next timeslot. In this case, interference is generated. Therefore, when a call is ongoing, the BTS monitors the arrival of calls and sends commands to the MS in the system information on the downlink SACCH. In the commands, the BTS informs the MS of the time to be advanced so that the data sent by the MS can arrive at the BTS timely. The time is referred to as TA. The TA value ranges from 0 μs to 233 μs (including 0 μs and 233 μs). The value affects the coverage range of the cell. With this feature, the MS TA offset maintains an accuracy of +1/-1 symbol periods.



121


1 Basic Features

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.10.2 GBFD-110801 Processing of Measurement Report Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary The measurement result in the MR is an important reference for power control and handover decision. The MR processing mainly involves decoding the MR to obtain the measurement result.

Benefits The MR includes information required by various BSS algorithms, such as the frequencies, signal strength, and TA value. The MR is the precondition of power control and handover. The network can provide high performance only when the MR is supported.

Description The MR processing is used to report the measurement results and parameters to the BSC for handover decision and power control. The MR is classified into uplink MR and downlink MR. 

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Uplink MR


122


1 Basic Features

The uplink MR includes the measurement information on the uplink receive level and receive quality measured on the TRX. 

Downlink MR The downlink MR includes mainly the measurement information on downlink receive level and downlink receive quality of the serving cell, and downlink receive level of the neighboring cell measured by the MS. The downlink measurement result is reported to the BTS by the MS through the Measurement Report message. The BTS periodically reports the measurement results of the uplink and downlink to the BSC through the Measurement Report message. The interval of MR reporting is consistent with the SACCH multi-frame cycle. In certain situations, the BTS cannot receive the downlink measurement result from the MS. In such cases, the Measurement Report message includes only the uplink measurement result. After receiving the MR, the BSC performs interpolation and filtering on the measurement result in the uplink and downlink. Then, the BSC saves the results for power control and handover decision.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA









GBFD-110802 Pre-processing of Measurement Report

Impacted Features NA

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


123


1 Basic Features

1.10.3 GBFD-110802 Pre-processing of Measurement Report Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary Pre-processing of measurement report enables the BTS to perform part of the MR processing work that the BSC is responsible for, such as interpolation and filtering performed for the measurement result in the uplink and downlink. After processing, the BTS sends the processed measurement result to the BSC. This reduces the processing load of the BSC.

Benefits This feature reduces the signaling flow on the Abis interface and the possibility of transmission congestion on the Abis interface. This feature helps reduce the CPU load of the board for signaling processing of the speech services.

Description This feature enables the BTS to perform part of the MR pre-processing work that BSC is responsible for, such as interpolation and filtering. After being processed by the BTS, the measurement result is reported to the BSC through the Pre-Processed Measurement Report message. This feature can be enabled or disabled through the configuration of related parameters. In addition, the period to report the preprocessed MR is also configurable. BTS preprocessing of the MR can reduce the signaling flow on the Abis interface and improve the multiplexing efficiency of the signaling channel.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


124




1 Basic Features

CN NA



Other NEs NA







GBFD-110801 Processing of Measurement Report

1.10.4 GBFD-111101 System Information Sending Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary Huawei GBSS is capable of setting cell system information through the BSC and of periodically sending the system information by the BTS. On receiving the system information, the MS adjusts its settings based on the content in the system information.

Benefits The system information is a key index used by operators to adjust the network and control the behavior of the MS. The system information also plays an important role in network optimization. 

Proper system information mechanism is essential to a network of high quality.



Better understanding of the system information helps improve the network structure and build high quality network.

Description System information contains the primary radio network parameters on the Um interface. The parameters are as follows: network identification parameters, cell selection parameters, system control parameters, and network function parameters. By receiving system information, the MS can access the network and use various services provided by the network. Huawei BSS supports 13 system information types: 1, 2, 2bis, 2ter, 2quater, 3, 4, 5, 5bis, 5ter, 6, 7, and 13. Among them, types 1, 2, 2bis, 2ter, 2quater, 3, 4, 7, and 13 are broadcast messages transmitted on the BCCH in idle mode. Types 5, 5bis, 5ter, and 6 are associated messages transmitted on the SACCH in connected mode. Among the 13 system information types, 1, 2, 2bis, 2ter, 3, 4, 5, 5bis, 5ter, and 6 are basic system information messages. Types 7 and 13 are system information transmitted to support the GPRS. Type 2quater is the system information transmitted to support the inter-RAT handover and inter-RAT reselection. System information messages are sent in two different ways: broadcast message and associated message.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


125


1 Basic Features

When the MS is in idle mode, it communicates with the network through the broadcast system information. From the broadcast system information received from the network, the MS learns its current location and the available service types. Some parameters in the system information can also help control the cell reselection of the MS. When the MS is engaged in a call, it communicates with the network through the associated system information. The network uses certain content in the associated system information to control the transmission, power, and handover of the MS. The broadcast system information is closely related to the channel-associated message. The content in the broadcast system information can overlap with that in the associated message. The content in the associated message might be inconsistent with that in the broadcast system information, because the associated message affects only one MS, while the broadcast system information affects all MSs in idle mode. System information contains the following key parameters of the network: 

Network identity parameter



ATT (IMSI attach-detach allowed)



CCCH CONF (common control channel configuration)



BS AG BLKS RES (number of blocks reserved for access granted)



BS PA MFRMS (paging channel multi-frames)



T3212 (Periodical location update timer)



Cell Channel Description



Neighbor Cells Description



MBR (Multiband Report)



CELL_BAR_ACCESS This parameter indicates whether a cell allows the access of an MS. It is a one-bit code: Value 0 indicates that the access is allowed, and value 1 indicates that the access is not allowed. This parameter does not influence the access of MSs that are handed over to the cell.



PI (cell re-selection parameter indicator)

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


126


1 Basic Features

NA 

Other NEs NA







1.10.5 GBFD-111102 Forced System Information Sending by OMC Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary Huawei BSS supports the function that the system information can be sent forcibly to a certain cell through the BSC and the system information of certain cells is updated forcibly.

Benefits The system information is a key index used by operators to adjust the network and control the behavior of the MS. The system information also plays an important role in network optimization. With this feature, the network quality can be further improved as follows: 

Proper system information mechanism is essential to a quality network. This feature enables the network optimization personnel to adjust the parameters and verify the adjustment for specific cells in real time, facilitating the network optimization.



When problems occur in the network, this feature helps assist the maintenance personnel in troubleshooting.

This feature enables the operators to improve the network quality, provide better services to MSs, and improve the user satisfaction.

Description On the LMT, the system information of a cell can be forcibly updated and sent. During the network optimization, the system information on the Abis interface can be traced for checking certain system information configuration. The parameter configuration of system information can be obtained immediately by using the function of sending system information forcibly. This feature helps network optimization personnel and maintenance personnel to verify network parameters after parameter adjustment.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


127


1 Basic Features

NA 

BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.10.6 GBFD-111901 Supporting Three-Digit MNC Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary This feature supports both 3-digit and 2-digit MNCs.

Benefits This feature meets the networking requirements of operators whose MNC is 3 digits.

Description MNC can be configured as 3 digits or 2 digits according to the network planning. For the countries and areas with multiple mobile networks, 2-digit MNC cannot specify all the networks. In this case, 3-digit MNC can be adopted. The number of networks specified by the MNC is increased from 100 to 1000.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


128


1 Basic Features

NA 







MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.10.7 GBFD-116101 Support of Daylight Saving Time Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS7.0.

Summary The BSS supports the daylight saving time (DST), which can be configured and queried to meet the requirements of the countries where the daylight saving time is applied.

Benefits In normal cases, the DST is one hour earlier than the standard time. With this feature, the system time can be automatically changed without manual intervention according to the specified rules.

Description Huawei BSS can set and query the time zone and DST change rules on the U2000 or LMT. With the DST change rules, you can select the date configuration, week configuration, or hybrid configuration. Date configuration indicates the DST starts from or ends on a certain date in a certain month. Week configuration indicates that the DST starts from or ends on a certain day of a certain week in a certain month. Hybrid configuration indicates that the DST starts from or ends on a certain day after a certain date in a certain month.

Enhancement None

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


129


1 Basic Features

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.10.8 GBFD-113001 SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary This feature can dynamically adjust the number of SDCCHs according to the load of the TCHs and SDCCHs. In this way, the effect of the initial configuration of the SDCCH on the system is minimized and radio resources are fully utilized.


Optimizes the usage of the TCHs and SDCCHs, and reduces the occurrence of SDCCH congestion.



Minimizes the impact of the initial configuration of the SDCCH on the system, reduces the requirements on the accuracy of the estimation of the SDCCH, and reduces the workload for changing the configuration.



Reduces the call access failure caused by the congestion of the SDCCH, improves the call access rate, and increases the operator revenue.

Description In normal cases, the demands on the SDCCH are calculated on the basis of the traffic model. That is, current traffic distribution and related statistics. The increase of the SMS service, Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


130


1 Basic Features

however, leads to the more demands on the SDCCH. Therefore, the prediction on the demanded SDCCHs becomes very complex. If the number of MSs in a cell increases sharply in a short time, many MSs fail to access the network due to no available SDCCH. In this case, the SDCCH dynamic adjustment feature can convert the TCH into the SDCCH dynamically to enable more MSs to access the network. The dynamic adjustment of SDCCH takes cell as unit. If the SDCCH dynamic adjustment is allowed, the system automatically converts the TCH into the SDCCH, provided that the following conditions are met: 

The number of idle SDCCHs is lower than or equal to the threshold of the idle SDCCH.



The number of SDCCHs in a cell is lower than or equal to the maximum number of SDCCHs in a cell.



The number of idle TCHs in a cell is higher than 4 or higher than the number of TRXs configured in a cell. At the same time, the BSC sends the configuration command to the BTS to convert the TCH into the SDCCH, and updates the channel table of the BSC.

When the number of SDCCHs is higher than the defined threshold after the TCH Minimum Recovery Time, the SDCCHs are converted into the TCHs. Forced restoration of SDCCH: If you disable the SDCCH/TCH dynamical adjustment feature, all the SDCCHs converted from TCH are restored to their original form (TCH). This feature can reduce the requirement on the accuracy of the estimation of the demand on SDCCH, and reduce the workload for changing the configuration. In addition, it can increase the system capacity and the call access rate.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA






Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Mutually Exclusive Features Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

131


1 Basic Features

NA

1.10.9 GBFD-112401 Cell Frequency Scan Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary With this feature, you can test the uplink interference on the basis of the traffic measurement without the test device.


The maintenance personnel can test the uplink interference without the test device. In this way, the accuracy of the frequency configuration is improved and an overview of the uplink interference is provided.



Operators can evaluate the electromagnetic environment without the addition of new devices, which is an observation method of network planning and optimization.



This feature improves the maintenance efficiency and reduces the O&M cost for operators.

Description This feature uses the idle TCH to test uplink receive level of all the frequencies of the specified frequency band. Engineers can use the result to select a proper operating frequency. This feature is introduced to Huawei products for testing the interference. Because this feature scans the uplink level, the result indicates the signal strength of the frequency in the cell. Engineers can use the result to select a proper operating frequency. The GBSS implements the cell frequency scanning on the basis of the traffic measurement result. Under the condition that the call is not affected, the feature uses an idle frame in a TCH in the cell (the TCH in the BCCH TRX is assigned preferably) to periodically scan the uplink receive level of specified frequencies. It takes about one minute to scan 50 frequencies. A frequency scan task can register up to 124 frequencies. It takes about three minutes to traverse all the frequencies. The result of the frequency scanning is the average value of the uplink receive levels scanned from the beginning of the scan task to the end of the scan task. The uplink frequency scan feature is to test the interference level that affects the uplink receive quality in the radio environment. It can measure the uplink interference of a specific frequency.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


132




1 Basic Features

BSC6910 Hardware NA



GBTS(GTMU) Hardware BTS3900B does not support this feature.






MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.10.10 GBFD-111806 STP (Signaling Transport Point) Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary This feature supports the signaling transfer function based on the SCCP/M3UA, which supports a maximum of 32 signaling transfer points (STP).

Benefits With the development of mobile communications, the networking modes of the core network, transport network, and access network are more flexible. Huawei GBSS supports this feature to meet the requirements of the operators in terms of the networking mode. With this feature, more flexible networking mode can be supported. This feature provides the following benefits: 

Implements the transfer between the CN and the BSC signaling through the MGW, separating the signaling plane from the user plane.



Implements different levels of the transmission security, ensuring the security of the core service in an efficient way and reducing the transmission cost.

Description Huawei GBSS supports the signaling transfer function on the A interface based on the SCCP/M3UA. With this feature, the BSC can be connected to the MGW through the signaling transfer mode, providing more transmission networking modes. Currently, the GBSS supports a maximum of 32 STPs. Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


133


1 Basic Features

In the case of 24-digit signaling point, the value of STP code ranges from 0x1 to 0xFFFFFF. In the case of 14-digit signaling point, the value of STP code ranges from 0x1 to 0x03FFF. The STP codes should be different from the codes of the existing OSP, STP, or DSP.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA






Other NEs NA







1.10.11 GBFD-111802 14-Digit Signaling Point Code Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary Huawei GBSS supports the connection of the SS7 signaling system and the MSC. The SS7 signaling system adopts 14-digit signaling point code. The signaling point code includes three parts: macro cell code, zone code, and signaling point code.

Benefits The signaling point code has different code modes based on different countries and areas. Generally, it is classified into two types: 14-digit (international) and 24-digit (national) signaling code modes. Huawei GBSS supports both code modes. This feature provides the following benefits:

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


134


1 Basic Features



This feature conforms to the requirements of different signaling systems, facilitating the use of networking in different countries and areas.



The equipment transferred to the area using different code modes can still be used.

Description This feature supports 14-digit international signaling point. The code capacity of 14-digit signaling point code is 16,384 codes. 14-digit signaling point code is classified into three parts: macro cell code, zone code, and signaling point code. 24-digit signaling point code is applied in China since 1990. It is also called uniform code or one-layer code. This code specifies that all the signaling points of the SS7 signaling network in China must use 24-digit signaling point code. According to the actual situation, 24-digit signaling point code is classified into three signaling zones in terms of the structure. That is, eight digits for codes of main signaling zone, eight digits for codes of sub-signaling zone, and eight digits for signaling point codes. In the signaling network, a signaling point communicates with other signaling points through the signaling point code. The signaling point code identifies the signaling points that can communicate with the signaling points in a signaling network. To facilitate the management of the signaling network, the CCITT specifies in Rec. Q705 that the international signaling network and other national signaling networks should be independently deployed. Therefore, the signaling point codes are also independent. In Rec. Q708, the plan of the international signaling point code is specified. In addition, the national signaling point codes can be determined by the administrative department according to the actual situations of each country. Each country can adopt 14-digit signaling point code or 24-digit signaling point code as required.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA






Other NEs NA

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


135




1 Basic Features





1.10.12 MRFD-210801 Interface Message Tracing Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Summary This feature is used for interface message tracing in online/offline mode, tracing result review, and routine equipment management.

Benefits This feature simplifies the process of monitoring the signaling over the radio transmission interfaces and facilitates network optimization and fault rectification.

Description This feature is used for interface message tracing in online/offline mode and routine equipment management. With this feature, the GBSS/RAN can trace messages in real time, stop updating, save the tracing messages, review the tracing result, and check the time when the message is sent. In this way, the maintenance personnel can accurately locate and solve problems. In addition, all the interfaces have the condition filtering function. Therefore, the maintenance personnel can reduce the number of traced messages through condition filtering, improving the tracing accuracy. Subscriber information such as IMSI, IMEI, IMEISV, MSISDN, and IP address in traced messages is anonymized before being provided. In the case of the GBSS system: The BSSAP, MTP2, MTP3, and SCCP messages can be traced over the A interface as required. The BSSAP messages can be filtered according to the message types such as the BSSMAP, paging messages, and DTAP messages. You can also select the traced messages according to the cell. The RSL, OML, and LAPD messages can be traced over the Abis interface. The LAPD messages can be filtered according to the site and TRX number. The RSL messages can be filtered according to the message type, such as the measurement report, paging, and channel request. The OML messages can also be filtered according to the message type. The application layer messages and the LAPD messages can be traced over the Pb interface. The LAPD message can be selected and traced according to the timeslot number. The application layer messages can be traced according to the site number and the message types such as paging. In the case of the RAN system: The operator can verify the configuration data, locate and solve problems by tracing the messages over the Iu, Iub, Iur, and Uu interfaces. After the configuration data is set, the operator can determine the correctness of the signaling links by tracing and interpreting the Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


136


1 Basic Features

messages over the Iu, Iub, Iur, and Uu interfaces. The operators can also locate exceptions when exceptions occur. Therefore, tracing and interpreting the messages over the Iu, Iub, Iur, and Uu interfaces can take the place of the signal analyzer to perform the interoperability test between the RNC and other network elements. All the interfaces can filter the messages according to the message layer or the logical object. In this way, the number of traced maintenance signaling messages can be greatly reduced. Therefore, the tracing accuracy is improved and the problem location speed is accelerated. Operators can also use this feature to optimize the network.

Enhancement 

GBSS8.0 Supports the tracing over the Gb interface and the packet message tracing over the Um interface.



GBSS8.1 Supports the tracing of the VGCS/VBS messages

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.10.13 MRFD-210802 User Signaling Tracing Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


137


1 Basic Features

Summary With this feature, the signaling of an MS can be traced on the GBSS/RAN side. In a tracing window, all the signaling of an MS in the GBSS/RAN can be traced. In addition, you can manage the tracing task, save the messages, and review the tracing result.

Benefits This feature facilitates the monitoring of specified MS's signaling and facilitates network optimization and fault rectification.

Description This feature allows users to type characteristic words of called MSs (including the IMSI, TMSI, MSISDN, and IMEI) on the LMT or U2000 to trace the signaling of calling MSs. If the ID anonymization function is enabled, users need to type the anonymized IMSI, MSISDN, and IMEI. The host decodes the signaling of each call. If the MS information in the signaling matches the characteristic words of the MS to be traced, the host returns the signaling of this call to the OMC for display. With this feature, MSs' signaling over all interfaces can be traced, saved, and viewed. This prevents a large number of signaling messages from being traced over each interface. Therefore, the troubleshooting efficiency improves, facilitating problem location. Subscriber information such as IMSI, IMEI, IMEISV, MSISDN, and IP address in traced messages is anonymized before being provided. This feature supports signaling tracing for specified MSs. Based on the traced signaling messages for specified MSs, operators can learn about the network status and optimize their networks accordingly.

Enhancement 

GBSS8.1 Supports the PS single user tracing and VGCS/VBS message tracing.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


138




1 Basic Features





1.10.14 GBFD-112203 Cell Tracing Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.1.

Summary With this feature, you can trace all the signaling of multiple calls in a cell. In this way, the maintenance personnel can locate the problem in an efficient way.

Benefits When you handle the voice problems, especially the problems related to the signaling procedure and performance, you need to analyze the signaling on the A or Abis interface. The common methods are drive test (DT) or dialing test. Together with the traced data obtained by the signaling unit, the signaling can be analyzed. This process, however, is very complex and expensive. The cell tracing log facilitates to locate the network problem. You can directly trace calls in the existing network and save the cost of the DT and dialing test for locating the problem.

Description You can issue the cell tracing command on the U2000 to trace the calls of a specific cell. A maximum of 16 calls in the specific cell can be traced at a time. The cell tracing feature applies the first-in first-tracing principle. After a tracing task is started, the first accessed 16 calls in the traced cell are traced. If a call is complete, a newly accessed call is traced. Subscriber information such as IMSI, IMEI, IMEISV, MSISDN, and IP address in traced messages is anonymized before being provided. You can choose the cells to be traced on the basis of the CELLID. The GBSC enables users to save and review the tracing log. You can also choose to trace only the signaling on the A or Abis interface. When the message on the Abis interface is traced, you can determine whether to trace the MR.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA




Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


139




1 Basic Features




MS NA



CN NA










1.10.15 GBFD-111301 LAPD Multiplexing at Abis Interface Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary Each BTS has an operation and maintenance link (OML) that works at the rate of 64 kbit/s. Each TRX has a radio signaling link (RSL) that works at the rate of 64 kbit/s. This feature allows multiple RSLs and OMLs to be multiplexed onto one 64 kbit/s timeslot on the Abis link in TDM transmission mode.

Benefits Except for the timeslot 0 used for synchronization, there are 31 timeslots on one E1 link are used for the signaling and service transmission. If the signaling compression technology is not used, one E1 link can only carry the data and signaling of only 10 TRXs. In some areas where the transmission resources are limited or expensive, saving transmission bandwidth is a major concern of operators. This feature allows a maximum of 15 TRXs to be carried on one E1 link. With the rapid development of data services, the transmission resources on the Abis interface become more and more limited. For example, an EGPRS service with the MCS9 coding scheme occupies four 64 kbit/s channels, and EDGE Evolution requires a higher bandwidth. If the signaling and services are not compressed, the new services developed by operators will consume a huge amount of transmission resources. This feature multiplexes the bandwidth onto the signaling links and saves the transmission resources on the Abis interface.

Description In Huawei BSC, the interface board connected to the BTS supports two multiplexing modes: 16 kbit/s sub-timeslot exchange and N:1 multiplexing. These two modes are targeted at the RSL or OML signaling channels. The TCH adopts the exclusive mode. The full-rate speech channel is 16 kbit/s and the half-rate speech channel is 8 kbit/s.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


140


1 Basic Features

If full-rate channels are configured in the TRX, the BSS allows the signaling of four RSLs to be multiplexed onto one 64 kbit/s timeslot on the E1 link. Then, the calls of multiple TRXs can be carried on one E1 link, saving the transmission resources on the Abis interface. If 4:1 multiplexing mode is applied, Huawei BSS allows a maximum of 15 TRXs to be carried on one E1 link. If half-rate channels are configured in the TRX, the N:1 multiplexing mode is applied to the Abis interface, where N can be 2, 3, or 4. The capacity of the speech channel doubles. Therefore, the signaling volume on the RSL of each TRX is doubles. Therefore, the 2:1 multiplexing mode is used by default. That is, the RSLs of a maximum of two TRXs can be multiplexed onto one 64 kbit/s timeslot on the E1 link. The multiplexing ratio is closely related to the total number of TRXs that one E1 supports. Because the traffic volume on the signaling channel in half-rate configuration mode is heavy, the recommended value of N is 2, that is, 2:1 is the recommended multiplexing ratio. In this case, one E1 link supports a maximum of 13 TRXs in half-rate configuration. If the BTSs are cascaded, they can have different multiplexing ratios. For example, three BTSs are cascaded in S1/1/1 cell configuration. Then, the multiplexing ratio of the level 1, level 2, and level 3 BTSs can be set to 4:1, 2:1, and 4:1 respectively.

Enhancement 

GBSS7.0 When GBFD-117301 Flex Abis is enabled, N in the N:1 multiplexing mode can be set to 5 or 6 for a higher multiplexing ratio. For details, refer to the description of GBFD-7301 Flex Abis.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


141


1 Basic Features

1.10.16 GBFD-114802 Discontinuous Reception (DRX) Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary Discontinuous Reception (DRX) means that the MS monitors the messages in the specified timeslots according to the parameters configured in the system. This reduces the power consumption of the MS and prolongs the standby time of the MS.

Benefits This feature greatly reduces the power consumption of the MS and prolongs the standby time of the MS.

Description If the MS in idle mode selects a cell as its serving cell, it can listen to the paging message in the cell. The DRX is introduced to reduce the power consumption of the MS. That is, each MS (corresponding to an IMSI) corresponds to a dedicated paging group. Each paging group corresponds to a paging sub-channel of the cell. The MS can calculate its paging group according to the last three digits of the IMSI and the configuration of the paging channels of the serving cell, and therefore calculates the location of the paging sub-channel of this paging group. In idle mode, the MSs of a paging group listen to the paging messages only on the fixed paging sub-channel (during this period, it can also monitor the receive level of the BCCH TRX of the non-serving cell) and ignore the paging messages on other paging subchannels or even shut down some hardware devices. This can reduce the power consumption of the MS, provided that the necessary network message measurement task is implemented within a certain period. The number of paging sub-channels of each cell can be calculated according to the CCCH type, BS AG BLKS RES (in 51 multi-frames, some data blocks are used for the AGCH block), and BS PA MFRMS (the number of 51 multi-frames used for a paging on the paging sub-channel). In the GSM system, the CCCH is classified into the AGCH and the PCH. The main function of the CCCH is to send immediate assignment messages and paging messages. The CCCH can be borne by a physical channel or multiple physical channels. The CCCH can share a physical channel with the SDCCH. The combination of the CCCH in the cell is determined by the parameter CCCH CONF. The settings of CCCH CONF must be consistent with the actual configurations. When the cell has only one TRX, it is recommended that the CCCH shares a physical channel with the SDCCH (meanwhile, there are three CCCH message blocks). In some cases, the paging traffic in an LA is excessively high, and one physical channel is insufficient for sending paging messages. Therefore, the GSM specifications specify that the BCCH TRX can be configured with multiple CCCHs, but the CCCHs can only be configured on timeslots 0, 2, 4, and 6.



142


1 Basic Features

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA












CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.10.17 GBFD-111601 BTS Power Management Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary BTS power management supports hierarchical power-off and voltage abnormal protection.

Benefits This feature enhances power management and self-protection of the BTS, improving the reliability of the system, prolonging the lifespan of products and serving time of the system. With this feature, both the BTS stability and the QoS are improved. In addition, the O&M cost for the BTS is reduced, increasing the revenues of operators.

Description Huawei BTS can flexibly deal with the system load according to the actual situations, prolonging the serving time of the system. When there is no mains supply, the BTS hierarchical power-off function reduces the power consumption and raises the duration of the storage battery. On one hand, when the mains supply is not available, all the TCH TRXs are shut down except the BCCH TRX. This is called soft shutdown. On the other hand, when the capacity of the storage batteries drops to the preset value, all the TRXs are powered off automatically to protect the storage batteries. This is called hard shutdown. The use of the automatic power-off mode is configurable. Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


143


1 Basic Features

This feature mainly applies to the BTSs in cascading connection. When the mains power of the upper-level BTS is powered off and the mains power of the lower-level BTS is normal, this feature can prolong the working time of the transmission module of the upper-level BTS to reduce the impact on the lower-level BTS. When the working temperature is high or the temperature regulation unit does not work properly, the TMU shuts down the power amplification of some TRXs if the temperature exceeds the threshold in the cabinet. This prevents any negative impact on the system. If the TRX is faulty or the VSWR exceeds the limit, to minimize the chance of total damage, the TRX is allowed to quit the services and shut down the power, including the power of the power amplifier. Whether this function is to be enabled and the parameters to be used can be set. Therefore, the flexibility of the system is improved. In this way, the power management and self-protection for the BTS are enhanced. Therefore, the reliability of the system is improved and the lifespan of the products is prolonged.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.10.18 GBFD-110703 Enhanced Power Control Algorithm Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


144


1 Basic Features

Summary Huawei enhanced power control algorithm is designed on the basis of Huawei network optimization experiences. The enhanced power control algorithm has the following characteristics: MR compensation, prediction filtering, dual-threshold power control algorithm, variable step power control, adaptive power control, bad quality signal strength upper threshold adjustment, and separate configuration for the uplink and downlink power control steps. With all these characteristics, this feature improves the accuracy of the power control and also ensures the stability and efficiency of the algorithm.


Improves the effectiveness and accuracy of the power control.



Reduces the interference in the network.



Reduces the power consumption of the MS and BTS.



Increases the effective capacity of the network.



Improves the network operation quality.

Description Power control is an important method for radio link control. The system decides whether the transmit power of the MS and the BTS should be adjusted, based on the expected values of the system parameters and MRs concerning uplink/downlink receive level and signal quality received from the BTS. Power control on the radio link is aimed at reducing the transmit power without sacrificing the transmit quality. In this way, power control is implemented while the quality of the radio links is maintained. When the transmit power levels of the MS or BTS are minimized, interference to other channels is reduced. 

Power control procedure The power control procedure involves MR preprocessing, power control decision, and power control implementation.



Key technologies MR compensation: The level in the MR is compensated to a level corresponding to the current transmit power. In power control decision, the power control module extracts several receive level values and receive quality values from history MRs. These MRs may be obtained under different transmit power. Therefore, in order to ensure the accuracy of the receive level, the receive level values from the history MRs must be compensated if the transmit power in these MRs changes. Filter these MRs after interpolation and compensation so that the power control decision is more effective. Prediction filtering: An interval exists between power control decision and power adjustment. Therefore, the MR on which the power control decision is based does not accurately reflect the radio environment when power adjustment occurs, but misses the latest changes of receive level and receive quality. Therefore, there is a delay for power adjustment. Prediction filtering enables the MR on which the power control decision is based to accurately reflect the radio environment when power adjustment occurs. Therefore, the delay for power adjustment can be minimized. The principle of prediction filtering is that the variation of receive level and receive quality maintains continuity in a short period of time. Sample the preceding N MRs, and perform weighted filtering, and then predict the subsequent zero to three MRs. Generally, the interval between power control decision and power adjustment is 3 MRs (about 1.5s). Therefore, prediction filtering can ensure the accuracy of prediction. Power control decision is implemented by

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


145


1 Basic Features

filtering the predicted MRs along with the interpolated MRs and compensated history MRs. Dual-threshold power control algorithm: The receive level can be within the scope of the dual-threshold. The effect of both level and quality on power control is considered. This improves the system flexibility and prevents the oscillation. Variable step power control: This technology helps achieve quick and accurate power adjustment. When the level or the quality is far from the expected value, large step of the power is adopted for power adjustment. When the level or the quality is close to the expected value, small step of the power is adopted for power adjustment. Adaptive power control: This technology changes the power control strategy based on the communication environment, making the power control effective and stable. This is reflected in the following aspects: automatically changing the maximum variable step of the power control based on the communication environment and adopting corresponding power control strategy based on the communication environment. Bad quality signal strength upper threshold adjustment: When the receive quality is good, decrease the value of upper threshold of the uplink (downlink) level to reduce the transmit power of the MS (BTS). When the receive quality is poor, increase the value of upper threshold of the uplink (downlink) level to improve the voice quality. Separate configuration for the uplink and downlink power control steps: This method facilitates the flexible and rapid power control based on the actual situation of the network. When the uplink (downlink) signal quality or the receive quality degrades abruptly, the power can be adjusted upward quickly to prevent call drop.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


146


1 Basic Features

1.10.19 GBFD-113525 DTMF Downlink Message Filter Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS12.0.

Summary This feature checks and completely deletes the DL DTMF messages on the user plane and control plane of the Abis interface.

Benefits This feature deletes the DL DTMF messages to ensure operator controlling the network.

Description This feature shields the DL DTMF messages on the user plane and control plane of the Abis interface. In this case, after the call is set up, the called cell phone will not receive DTMF signals. By shielding DL DTMF signals, this feature enhances the GBSS network security.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware Support









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA






Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


GBFD-118602 A over IP

−

GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1


147


1 Basic Features

1.10.20 GBFD-115201 High Speed Signaling Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary With this feature, N timeslots in an E1 are bound for the physical transmission of the SS7 signaling. A maximum of 2 Mbit/s E1 bandwidth (N = 31) can be used.

Benefits This feature breaks the capacity limitation of a single signaling point using the narrowband signaling. In addition, this feature saves the signaling point resources and reduces the networking complexity while meeting the signaling bandwidth requirements of the high processing capacity of the BSC.

Description With network expansion, development of new services, popularization of the short message service and wireless intelligent network service, and increase in the traffic volume, the signaling flow between different signaling points increases rapidly. According to the protocols related to the SS7 signaling, a maximum of 16 signaling links are allowed between single signaling points. If the 64 kbit/s signaling link is used, a maximum of 1 Mbit/s bandwidth can be provided for a single signaling point in the entire system. This is far from the requirements for the signaling link bandwidth when the BSC is in full configuration. With this feature, N timeslots in an E1 are bound for the physical transmission of the SS7 signaling. Therefore, the bandwidth of a signaling link is extended to N x 64 kit/s and a maximum of 2 Mbit/s E1 bandwidth (N = 31) can be used. The high-speed signaling has the following characteristics: Large capacity This feature breaks the capacity limitation of a single signaling point using the narrowband signaling, saves the signaling point resources, and reduces the networking complexity while meeting the signaling bandwidth requirements of the high processing capacity of the BSC. Flexible bandwidth configuration The bandwidth of the high-speed signaling link is N x 64 kbit/s, where N ranges from 1 to 31. This enables the operator to flexibly configure the physical bandwidth according to the traffic volume of the BSC, reducing the transmission cost. Low delay The high-speed signaling link uses bound timeslots to carry the signaling data. This effectively reduces the transmission delay over the A interface when the traffic volume is low, reducing the call establishment duration to some extent. This feature is used together with the Local Multiple Signaling Points feature to support more flexible signaling networking mode.

Enhancement 

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


148


1 Basic Features

This application enhancement supports the use of high-speed signaling in the MSC pool.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA












MS NA






Other NEs NA








−


1.10.21 GBFD-110521 Guaranteed Emergency Call Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.1.

Summary In the cells with heavy traffic, the emergency call procedure is enhanced to improve the success rate of emergency call establishment.

Benefits The success rate of emergency call establishment is guaranteed when the traffic in the network is heavy.

Description In most networks, the emergency call services specified by GSM specifications are mandatory. Compared with a common call, an emergency call has a higher priority and faster access capability. Therefore, the access rate and success rate of call establishment of the emergency call is guaranteed. However, in emergency situations such as an earthquake, tsunami, or flood, the traffic in the network is heavy. Hence, the emergency call service may not be implemented due to the lack of resources. Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


149


1 Basic Features

To avoid this circumstance, in the cells with heavy traffic, the emergency call procedure is enhanced to improve the success rate of emergency call establishment. To ensure that the TCH can be assigned to the MS that initiates an emergency call, the TCH is preferentially assigned in the immediate assignment and the channel mode is modified during service assignment. If no TCH is available in the immediate assignment, an SDCCH is assigned to the emergency call and the channel preemption is performed. If the channel is successfully preempted, the channel is reserved for the emergency call and then assigned to the emergency call during service assignment. Therefore, even if the traffic is heavy in the network, the success rate of emergency call establishment can be maximized.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs The eMLPP function must be enabled on the MSC.







1.10.22 GBFD-511001 License Control for Urgency Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS9.0 and RAN11.1.

Summary With this feature, the license limitation is withdrawn in emergencies so that the operator can handle the sudden increase in network capacity.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


150


1 Basic Features

Benefits With this feature, the operator can temporarily withdraw the license limitation in the case of a sudden increase in traffic volume due to natural disasters or holidays. Therefore, the equipment can be used effectively to optimum capacity.

Description The license limitation is withdrawn by manually running MML commands on the LMT or U2000. Therefore, the equipment can be used effectively to optimum capacity. For each R version, the operation personnel have three chances to withdraw the license limitation by running MML commands. The operation takes effect immediately after the commands are executed. The validity period is seven days. After the three chances are used up, a new chance can be obtained only through the software upgrade. For a GSM network, the licenses for all GBTSs under a BSC are managed by the BSC. Therefore, the license limitation for both the BSC and the GBTS is withdrawn by manually running MML commands on the LMT. However, GBTS(UMPT) licenses for all GBTS(UMPT) are managed by themselves. Therefore, the license limitation for the GBTS(UMPT) can only be withdrawn by running MML commands on the GBTS(UMPT).

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA









Impacted Features NA

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


151


1 Basic Features

1.10.23 GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS7.0.

Summary This feature enhances and optimizes the GBFD-110703 Enhanced Power Control Algorithm feature in terms of the filtering algorithm, interpolation of the measurement report, power control decision algorithm, and flexibility of threshold configuration.


Improves the efficiency and accuracy of power control.



Reduces the intra-network interference and the power consumption of the MS and BTS.



Increases the network capacity.



Improves the network performance.

Description Power control is an important method for radio link control. Based on the expected values set for parameters and the MRs on the uplink/downlink receive level and receive quality sent by the BTS, the BSC determines whether to adjust the transmit power of the MS and the BTS. Power control on the radio link is aimed at reducing the transmit power while maintaining the transmission quality. The HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm feature enhances and optimizes the GBFD110703 Enhanced Power Control Algorithm feature in terms of the filtering algorithm, interpolation of the measurement report, power control decision algorithm, and flexibility of threshold configuration. 

Optimizing the filtering/interpolation of the MR With this feature introduced, the incorrect MRs obtained at the initial stage of channel access do not affect the power control algorithm and therefore the change in trend of the transmit power of the MS can be predicted based on the MRs in a more timely and correct manner.



Optimizing the decision algorithm Based on the filtered receive level and receive quality, this algorithm considers the gain of the radio channel from frequency hopping, improving the accuracy of decisions.



Setting the power control threshold according to the service type This algorithm sets different power control thresholds for AMRFR services, AMRHR services, FR services, and HR services to optimize the power control on the AMR.

Enhancement 

GBSS8.1 Support implementing with "GBFD-110802 Pre-processing of Measurement Report."

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


152


1 Basic Features

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.10.24 GBFD-113301 Enhanced Full Rate Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary The enhanced full rate (EFR) is an improved speech coding scheme. The quality of the speech using EFR is better than that of the speech using FR.

Benefits User experience improves because the voice quality in the EFR scheme that uses the FR channel resource approaches or even exceeds the voice quality in the adaptive different pulse code modulation (ADPCM) scheme.

Description The EFR is an improved speech coding scheme working at 12.2 kbit/s. The voice quality in the EFR scheme that uses the FR channel resource approaches or even exceeds the voice quality in the adaptive different pulse code modulation (ADPCM) scheme. The EFR has good anti-noise performance. If the Um interface quality is good, subscribers are provided with the voice quality as good as the voice quality provided by wired telephones even when background noise is loud. Therefore, in the case of the same air interface quality, subscribers can perceive better voice quality in the EFR than in the FR.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


153


1 Basic Features

The EFR rate (12.2 kbit/s) is lower than the FR rate (13 kbit/s). Therefore, the EFR is not as sensitive as FR to the bit error rate (BER). This ensures more reliable data transmission on the Abis interface, which further improves the voice quality. The EFR is compatible with the highest rate of the narrowband adaptive multirate (AMR).

Enhancement 

GBSS8.1 The EFR is forcibly enabled in A over TDM transmission mode. If the EFR is supported by both the BSC and MSs but not supported by the MSC, the EFR can be forcibly enabled on the BSC. In this case, the used speech version is shielded on the MSC side to avoid assignment or handover failure. The EFR is forcibly enabled to improve voice quality when the voice quality is poor.



GBSS13.0 E-coder is used in A over TDM transmission mode. E-coder improves the EFR voice quality by using the filter enhancement technique during preprocessing and the Linear Spectral Pairs (LSP) exact-calculate technique. Ecoder increases the mean opinion score (MOS) by 0.05 to 0.12 but introduces an algorithm delay of 5 ms to an EFR encoder. E-coder is not supported in A over IP mode or when TFO is enabled.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA















Other NEs NA







Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


154


1 Basic Features

1.10.25 GBFD-115601 Automatic Level Control (ALC) Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary This ALC feature identifies speech signals and adjusts the sound volume to stay within in a comfort range, improving user experience.

Benefits This feature can level out the difference between the sound volumes controlled by different MS manufacturers and therefore balance the receive level adaptation of subscribers in different areas. In this manner, the subscribers can perceive better voice quality.

Description The ALC algorithm automatically controls the receive level. By evaluating the receive level of input signals, the ALC feature controls the gains of the input signals, adjusts the output signals to a certain target receive level, and maintains the stability and comprehensibility of the signal receive level. This way, subscribers can perceive comfort sound volume and good voice quality. The ALC offers the following modes: 

Fixed level mode The receive level of signals is adjusted to a fixed target value based on the receive level of the input voice.



Adaptive level mode The receive level of signals is adaptively adjusted to a value within a pre-determined range based on the receive level of the input voice.



Fixed gain mode The sound volume of input signals is raised or lowered in a fixed proportion based on the original sound volume.

Enhancement 

GBSS8.1 The ALC algorithm performance is optimized.



GBSS12.0 The anti-clip (ACLP) algorithm is introduced. The ACLP algorithm corrects the signals with relatively great amplitude, quickly repairs the speech wave, and then adjusts the volume. This improves user experience. The ACLP algorithm calculates the energy and spectrum characteristics of input speech signals in real time. If too-high-level signals suffer from amplitude limiting and experience distorted noises, the ACLP algorithm filters out distorted noises and performs nonlinear volume adjustments to repair the signal wave according to spectrum characteristics. In this manner, user experience with regard to the voice quality improves.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


155


1 Basic Features

The function of measuring and collecting statistics on signal levels online is introduced. The ALC algorithm can be used to measure and collect statistics on signal levels online so that operators can monitor signal levels and learn the distribution of signal levels to determine whether to enable the ALC algorithm for specific cells. 

GBSS14.0 The level adjustment performance is optimized. The speech tracing and adaptive capability of the ALC algorithm is optimized so that the ALC algorithm becomes more responsive to situations where the volume changes rapidly. The internal dependencies on a fixed clipping threshold of the ACLP algorithm are canceled so that the clipping threshold is adaptive to signal level changes. A counter is provided to measure the signal level and the number of clipping occurrences.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA












MS NA



CN NA



Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Other NEs Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

156


1 Basic Features

NA 






−

GBFD-150201 A over IP Based on Dynamic Load Balancing

−


−

GBFD-115701 TFO

−

GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch

−

GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch This feature does not take effective if one of the preceding features is enabled for a call.

1.10.26 GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation(AEC) Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary The AEC feature compares the major characteristics of the downlink voice with those of the uplink voice after a period of delay to identify and cancel the acoustic echoes generated by some MSs.

Benefits This feature reduces the acoustic echoes generated by some MSs, improving the voice quality and user experience.

Description Acoustic echoes are generated when some sound waves from an MS speaker are reflected off the microphone (MIC) and speech signals are sent back to the other MS because of the MS characteristics. The acoustic echoes are generated by the MS because the MS speaker is too close to the MIC and therefore the sound wave attenuation is insufficient. During a call, the input voice from the MSC is retained when being transmitted on the AEC module of the TC. After a period of delay, the remote input voice is compared with the local voice from the MS. If the codes of similar characteristics exist, he local voice is considered as the echo of the remote voice. Then, the echo is handled nonlinearly and replaced with comfort noise. In this manner, the original voice from the MIC is canceled, and therefore user experience improves.

Enhancement 

GBSS8.1 The AEC algorithm performance is optimized.



Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


157


1 Basic Features

The accuracy of echo identification and cancelation is increased by 10%, which is calculated by algorithm simulation. The error detection rate (negative impact of echo cancelation on speech quality) is decreased to 85% of the original, and the absolute error detection rate is less than 1%. A counter is provided to measure the number of echo occurrences.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA












MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA








−


−


−

GBFD-115701 TFO

−


−


1.10.27 GBFD-115603 Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR) Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS7.0.

Summary The ANR feature suppresses background noise during a call to reduce the receive level of noises, increasing the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR).

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


158


1 Basic Features

Benefits By suppressing background noise during a call, the ANR makes the voice clear, improving user experience.

Description The ANR distinguishes voice information from background noise based on the characteristics of input speech signals in different time domains and frequency domains. Then, the ANR uses a certain algorithm to reduce and suppress the background noise. By reducing the receive level of the noise and increasing the SNR, the ANR improves user experience without affecting the authentic voice.

Enhancement 

GBSS8.1 The ALC algorithm performance is optimized.



GBSS14.0 The efficiency for suppressing noise of the same type for a second time and suppressing unstable noise is improved. The capability to distinguish voice signals and music is significantly improved. A counter is provided to measure the number of times noise occurs at different levels.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA












MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA






Issue 04 (2015-03-04)



−


−


−

GBFD-115701 TFO

−

GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

159


−

1 Basic Features


1.10.28 GBFD-115702 TrFO Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary With this feature, the calling MS and called MS use the same speech coding scheme. Therefore, speech signals are coded at the calling MS once and decoded at the called MS once. This prevents the transcoder and rate adapter unit (TRAU) from repeatedly coding and decoding speech signals.


Provides better speech quality for users because speech signals are coded and decoded only once.



Saves TC resources because the TRAU is no longer used.



Repeated coding and decoding

Description In an MS-MS call process where TFO and TrFO are not used, speech signals are coded at the calling MS, transmitted on the Um interface, and then decoded at the first TRAU. The decoded PCM data flow is transmitted on the 64 kbit/s link to the second TRAU for coding and is then transmitted on the Um interface to the called MS for decoding. In this process, the coding and decoding are performed twice. 

TrFO overview The TrFO feature enables the calling MS and called MS to use the same speech coding. Therefore, speech signals are coded at the calling MS once and decoded at the called MS once. This prevents speech signal damage in repeated coding and decoding, improving the signal quality. In the GSM network, the coding schemes supported by a cell can be dynamically configured. The coding scheme over the Um interface is determined by the BSS. When implementing the TrFO, the MSC server selects the speech version supported by the cells where the calling MS and called MS are located. Then, the MSC server sets the expected speech version to a highest priority. In this way, the TrFO can be successfully implemented. The details are as follows: The BSC selects the speech version recorded in the Preferred Codec List carried in the assignment request sent by the MSC. The BSC carries the coding schemes supported by BSC cells in a Complete Layer 3 Information message and sends the message to the MSC to improve the TrFO success rate. To perform the TrFO services on established calls, the MSC sends an INTERNAL HANDOVER ENQUIRY message carrying the specified Speech Codec to the BSC to trigger an intra-BSC handover.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


160




1 Basic Features

Differences between TrFO and TFO Both TrFO and TFO use the speech compression in the MSC, and they prevent the repeated code conversions during an MS-MS call and improve the QoS. The two features, however, are different from each other. TFO is enabled, disabled, and controlled by the TRAU after a call is established. When the encoder and decoder use the same coding/decoding scheme, TFO is enabled to transmit the compressed speech. TrFO does not require the TRAU. Instead, it uses the Out-of-Band Transcoder Control (OoBTC) to negotiate the coding/decoding to be used by both the calling MS and called MS before a call is established. Then, the compressed speech is transmitted after the call is established. If the requirement for TrFO is not met, it takes some time to configure the TRAU for restoring the PCM coding/decoding. Without the TRAU, the call fails. In TFO, the PCM coding is immediately used when the requirement for TFO is not met. Therefore, the speech quality is not affected.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware The A interface must use the IP networking mode. An IP interface board is required.



BSC6910 Hardware The A interface uses the IP networking mode. An IP interface board is required.









MS NA






Other NEs NA






BSC6900: GBFD-118602 A over IP or GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1

−

BSC6910: GBFD-150201 A over IP Based on Dynamic Load Balancing


GBFD-115831 Mute SAIC MS Identification

−

GBFD-115832 VAMOS Call Drop Solution

−


−


Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


161


1 Basic Features

1.10.29 GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC) Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS9.0.

Summary The ANC feature evaluates the background noise level at the local end and the signal level at the peer end. It then adaptively increases the speech volume at the peer end if the background noise level at the local end is high. Therefore, this feature increases the ratio of the signal level at the peer end to the background noise level at the local end, improving voice quality.

Benefits Good speech quality is a basic requirement for a superior network. It is also the basic requirement of the customer and helps in testing the product. The problems such as acoustic echo, background noise, and packet loss must be solved to ensure the speech quality. In addition, the gain of signals should be controlled. To solve these problems, different manufacturers use different algorithms and features. Huawei GBSS uses the ANC feature to improve the speech quality in the scenarios with loud background noise such as in the downtown, marketplace, and cinema. Therefore, a network with enhanced performance is provided and the user satisfaction improves.

Description The ANC compensates the noise by using an algorithm. By estimating the background noise at the local end and the speech level at the peer end, this feature adaptively increases the speech volume at the peer end if the background noise at the local end is loud. Therefore, the ratio of the speech level at the peer end to the background noise at the local end is increased so that the listener can clearly hear the speaker. This feature is disabled by default. The ratio of the speech level at the peer end to the background noise at the local end can be manually configured. The maximum adjustment range is the maximum gain of the ANC, which can also be manually configured. The speech processing complies with the ITU-T G.169 standard This feature is a feature is a TC-specific feature and cannot be used with TrFO or TFO.

Enhancement 

GBSS14.0 A counter is provided to measure the number of times SNRs occur at different levels.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA






Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


162


1 Basic Features

NA 




MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA








−


−


−

GBFD-115701 TFO

−


−


1.10.30 GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC) Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS9.0.

Summary This feature applies to the EFR, AMR FR, and AMR HR speech versions. With this feature, the BSS uses an algorithm to restore and compensate the frames of lost packets when receiving the speech coding. This improves the anti-interference capabilities of the EFR, AMR FR, and AMR HR speech versions and the speech quality.


Helps solve the problem of speech frame loss during transmission and in a poor radio environment.



Provides a network with enhanced performance.



Improves the speech quality and user satisfaction.



Increases the MOS by 0 to 0.2 points in the case of packet loss of different severity.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


163


1 Basic Features

Description The problems such as acoustic echo, background noise, and packet loss must be solved to ensure the speech quality. In addition, the gain of signals should be controlled. To solve these problems, different manufacturers use different algorithms and features. This feature uses the patented algorithm to restore lost frames during transmission and in a poor radio environment based on the information about the previous frame. This implements the compensation for the frames of the lost packets. This feature is a TC-specific feature. It is used to process the AMR speech and controlled by a switch. This feature cannot be used with TrFO or TFO because the TC is not involved in TrFO or TFO.

Enhancement 

GBSS13.0 The packet loss prediction algorithm is optimized so that the received voice gets closer to the original voice in fidelity, improving user experience.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA












MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA






GBFD-115501 AMR FR, GBFD-115502 AMR HR, or GBFD-113301 EFR



−


−


−

GBFD-115701 TFO

−


−


Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


164


1 Basic Features

1.10.31 GBFD-118103 Network Support SAIC Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.1.

Summary The network side performs active power control for the MS supporting SAIC.

Benefits In the GSM network, the MS can use only a single antenna because of the limitations in size and cost. Therefore, the co-channel interference cannot be effectively suppressed and the spectral efficiency of the GSM system is reduced. Some attributes of interference are known, for example, channel modulation type and training sequence. Therefore, it is possible to improve the anti-interference capability of the receiver. The anti-interference technology called SAIC is defined in the 3GPP R6 protocol for the MS with a single antenna. SAIC can enhance the anti-interference capability of the downlink, increasing the capacity of the GSM system. With this feature, the network side performs active power control on the MS supporting SAIC to reduce the interference of the entire network, expand the system capacity, reduce the transmit power of the BTS, and save the power consumption.

Description SAIC is an anti-interference technology for suppressing the co-channel interference and adjacent-channel interference. The SAIC feature applies mainly to the MS with a single antenna and is used to reduce the impact of the interference reception of downlink signals through a signal processing technology. Compared with common mobile phones, the MS supporting SAIC has stronger anti-interference capacity. The network can modify the power control policy as required to reduce the transmit power of the BTSs, reducing the interference in the entire network. In downlink power control, the network checks whether the MS supports the SAIC. If the MS supports the SAIC, the network decreases the upper downlink level threshold and the lower downlink level threshold according to the Huawei III power control algorithm; the network increases the UL Qual.Upper Threshold and UL Qual.Lower Threshold, according to the Huawei II power control algorithm.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA






Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


165


1 Basic Features

Support 

MS The MS supports this feature.



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.10.32 GBFD-114801 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary The Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink feature can reduce the power consumption of the BTS and the frequency interference on the Um interface.


This feature reduces the power consumption of the BTS and intra-system interference.



From the perspective of the entire network, this feature reduces the frequency interference, increasing the network capacity.

Description DTX consists of Voice Activity Detection (VAD) and Silence Descriptor (SID). In addition, the GBSS automatically generates the comfortable noise to ensure the continuity of services. 

VAD When the Transcoder & Rate Adaptation Unit (TRAU) detests through the VAD module that the data received from the MSC contains no voice information, it clears the voice flag bit in the encoded TRAU frame. After identifying the flag bit, the BTS disconnects the downlink until the flag is reset.



SID The noise coding procedure is the same as the voice signal coding procedure. The SID frame also experiences the channel coding, interleaving, ciphering, and modulating and then is turned into the field containing the noise messages and sent out in eight continuous bursts.



Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Comfortable noise


166


1 Basic Features

When receiving the uplink frames, the TRAU also judges the SID flag. If the SID is set, the MS is in the intermittent period. To make subscribers feel that the GSM provides services continuously, the TRAU inserts comfortable noise in the uplink. With this feature, the TRAU can reduce the power consumption of the BTS, frequency interference on the Um interface. In downlink DTX mode, the GBSS equipment makes subscribers feel that the communication is continuous by providing the MSs with comfortable noise.

Enhancement 

GBSS8.1 Configuring the DTX according to the voice coding: DTXs for different voice coding can be configured separately. That is, you can enable the DTX for the FR (including FR, EFR, and AMR) voice coding and the DTX for HR (including HR and AMR HR) voice coding simultaneously, and you can also enable FR DTX or HR DTX separately. The flexible configuration helps reduce the intra-network interference while maintaining the voice quality.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA












CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.10.33 GBFD-114803 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


167


1 Basic Features

Summary If the encoder of the MS detects through the VAD module that the received voice signal is environment noise only, the MS periodically sends the SID, and then the TRAU restores the comfortable noise accordingly.


This feature greatly reduces the power consumption of the MS and prolongs the standby time of the MS.



From the perspective of the entire network, this feature reduces the frequency interference, increasing the network capacity.

Description The uplink DTX can reduce the transmit power of the MS and the co-channel interference on the Um interface. DTX consists of VAD and SID. In addition, the GBSS automatically generates the comfortable noise to ensure the continuity of services. 

VAD In uplink DTX mode, if the encoder of the MS detects through the VAD module that the received signal is environment noise only, the MS periodically sends the SID. When receiving the uplink frames, the TRAU also judges the SID flag. If the SID flag is set, the MS is in intermittent period. In this case, the TRAU restores the comfortable noise on the uplink to make subscribers feel that the communication is continuous.



SID The noise coding procedure is the same as the voice signal coding procedure. The SID frame also experiences the channel coding, interleaving, ciphering, and modulating and then is turned into the field containing the noise messages and sent out in eight continuous bursts.



Comfortable noise When receiving the uplink frames, the TRAU also judges the SID flag. If the SID is set, the MS is in the intermittent period. To make subscribers feel that the GSM provides continuous services, the TRAU inserts comfortable noise on the uplink.

The uplink DTX can reduce the transmit power of the MS, the co-channel interference on the Um interface and the power consumption of the MS, and prolong the call duration and standby time of the MS. In uplink DTX mode, the GBSS equipment makes subscribers feel that the communication is continuous by providing the MSs with comfortable noise.

Enhancement 

GBSS8.1 Configuring the DTX independently according to the voice coding: DTXs for different voice coding can be configured separately. That is, you can enable the DTX for the FR (including FR, EFR, and AMR) voice coding and the DTX for HR (including HR and AMR HR) voice coding simultaneously, and you can also enable FR DTX or HR DTX separately. The flexible configuration helps reduce the intra-network interference while maintaining the voice quality.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


168


1 Basic Features

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA












CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.10.34 GBFD-111604 Intelligent Combiner Bypass Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.1.

Summary With this feature, the original TRX with high output power is replaced by two TRXs with lower output power to reduce the power consumption of BCCH TRX while maintaining the network capacity in low traffic periods. Therefore, this feature saves power for the BTS.

Benefits This feature helps reduce the BTS power consumption and therefore greatly reduces the operational expenditure. The power consumption of TRXs constitutes a major part of the power consumption of BTSs. In the existing network, however, the TRXs are not always working. In low traffic periods, this feature can change the working status of TRXs to further reduce the power consumption without interfering with the coverage and therefore bring benefits to operators.

Description The ICB applies to the DTRU only. The ICB can be enabled only when all the non-BCCH carriers are idle, some channels on the BCCH carrier are idle in the cell, and the DTRU on the BCCH applies the combination mode with physical connection. For example, the ICB can be enabled in an S4 cell with single antenna, two DTRUs, and BCCH TRX in combination mode. Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


169


1 Basic Features

For an S4 cell, the output power of TRXs should be 30 W for the coverage requirement. In normal cases, the TRX transmits at a high power of 60 W. After the combination mode is applied, the output power is 30 W, which still meets the coverage requirement. In the existing network, the traffic is low in some periods. When the timeslots on the BCCH carrier are idle, the output power of the BCCH TRX is reduced to 15 W and the PBT mode is applied to ensure that the combined output power retains 30 W. In this way, the TRX power is reduced from 60 W to 15 W while maintaining the network capacity. This greatly reduces the energy consumption of the TRX and therefore reduces the power consumption of the BTS.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA



GBTS(GTMU) Hardware The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012/BTS3012AE(QTRU), DBS3900 (RRU3008), BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L (GRFU), BTS3900B/BTS3900E do not support this feature.






MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA






GBFD-111611 TRX Working Voltage Adjustment


GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping)

−

GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping

−

GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell

1.10.35 GBFD-510604 PICO USB Encryption Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS12.0.

Summary A BTS3900B is a PICO base station. When a BTS3900B is locally commissioned, a USB device is used to save the configuration file. The PICO USB Encryption feature enables the Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


170


1 Basic Features

encryption of the configuration file in the USB device so that the file is not displayed as plain text. In this way, the risk of disclosure of the configuration file is reduced.

Benefits The risk of disclosure of information because the files in the USB device are lost or stolen is reduced.

Description When a BTS3900B is locally commissioned, a USB device is used to save the configuration file. This file contains important configuration information, such as the IP addresses of network elements and IPsec keys. If the information is saved as plain text, it may be stolen or disclosed. After the PICO USB Encryption feature is introduced, the configuration file is encrypted by using encryption software on the U2000 side and then is decrypted on the BTS side. In this manner, the configuration file in the USB device is not displayed as plain text, ensuring information security.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA



GBTS(GTMU) Hardware Only the BTS3900B supports this feature.






MS NA



CN NA










Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


171


1 Basic Features

1.10.36 GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary A concentric cell consists of an overlaid subcell and an underlaid subcell. Different frequency reuse patterns can be applied to the overlaid and underlaid subcells. In a concentric cell, PS services can be evenly allocated to the overlaid and underlaid subcells according to different policies to achieve load sharing.


Increases system capacity without deteriorating voice quality by applying a tight frequency reuse pattern to the overlaid subcell.



Improves CS service performance while ensuring PS service performance by using appropriate PS load sharing policies.

Description With the number of subscribers increasing, frequency resources do not meet the growing capacity demand. Therefore, tight frequency reuse must be applied to increase frequency usage and network capacity. Tight frequency reuse, however, may greatly increase interference and even result in deterioration of voice quality. It is necessary to reduce interference and ensure voice quality in the tight frequency reuse pattern. The concentric cell technology divides a common cell into two service layers: overlaid subcell and underlaid subcell. 

For an MS in the underlaid subcell but not in the overlaid subcell, a TRX, such as the BCCH TRX, in the loose frequency reuse pattern should be assigned.



For an MS in the overlaid subcell, a TRX, such as a non-BCCH TRX, in the tight frequency reuse pattern should be assigned.

The tight frequency reuse pattern in the overlaid subcell improves the system capacity. Compared with the MSs in the underlaid subcell, the MSs in the overlaid subcell are far from the interference sources, and therefore the voice quality is guaranteed even if the tight frequency reuse pattern is applied to the overlaid subcell. The voice quality of the MSs in the underlaid subcell is also guaranteed when the loose frequency reuse pattern is applied. When the capacity of the coverage area changes, the channels in the overlaid subcell and underlaid subcell should be adjusted. For example, the traffic volume increases because a large number of calls are made within a short period in the overlaid subcell. Adjusting the TRX from the underlaid subcell to the overlaid subcell can expand the capacity of the overlaid subcell and therefore solve the problem of burst traffic increase. When the traffic volume becomes light, the original settings are restored. The BSS provides the power control, channel assignment, and handover algorithms regarding the concentric cell to balance the traffic distribution in the concentric cell.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


172


1 Basic Features

Enhancement 

GBSS7.0 Support for Main BCCH Configured in Overlaid Subcell: The BCCH can be configured either in the underlaid subcell or in the overlaid subcell. The BCCH configured in the overlaid subcell can increase the network capacity because the tight frequency reuse pattern is applied to the overlaid subcell. When the BCCH is configured in the overlaid subcell, the coverage area of the overlaid subcell must be equivalent to that of the underlaid subcell. This can reduce failures in handovers from the overlaid subcell to the underlaid subcell and reduce failures in overlaid subcell assignments, improving the network performance. Support for PDCH configured in Overlaid Subcell: The number of PDCHs increases with the growth of PS services. This aggravates the TCH congestion in the underlaid subcell. Configuring the PDCH in the overlaid subcell can absorb the PS services into the overlaid subcell, minimizing the congestion in the underlaid subcell and increasing the capacity of the concentric cell. The parameters of concentric handover should be set for CS services and PS services separately. This can implement timely handovers in CS domain and PS domain and reduce call drops.



GBSS14.0 The following PS load sharing policies are supported: Initial assignment or reassignment for PS services based on the frequency band capability supported by an MS Initial assignment or reassignment to the overlaid subcell based on the signal level Initial assignment or reassignment to the overlaid subcell based on the TA value Initial assignment or reassignment to the overlaid subcell based on the signal level and TA value The latter three policies ensure network quality after load sharing.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA




Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


173




1 Basic Features


GBFD-118001 BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing

−

GBFD-114001 Extended Cell

−

GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation)

1.10.37 GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.1.

Summary HUAWEI II handover algorithm is optimized from HUAWEI I handover algorithm. HUAWEI II handover algorithm takes all results of handover decisions into account, obtaining more accurate results of handover decisions.

Benefits This feature improves the accuracy of the handover decision and increases the handover success rate. This feature enhances the network quality and improves the network KPIs.

Description HUAWEI II handover algorithm takes account all results of handover decisions and candidate cell list, and then generates the handover execution policy. HUAWEI II handover algorithm is categorized into three handover algorithms: emergency handover (directed retry, frequency offset handover, bad quality handover, TA handover, and edge handover), intra-cell handover (interference handover, BCCH tight frequency multiplexing in concentric cell, AMR handover), inter-cell handover (better cell handover, enhanced dual band network handover, fast-moving handover, and GSM-to-UMTS inter-RAT handover). All handover decisions are traversed in the handover decision phase. Unlike common handover algorithms, HUAWEI II handover algorithm is not performed immediately if the triggering condition of a handover is met during the traverse. However, only the candidate target cell lists with handover decision type are generated independently. After all handover decisions are traversed, HUAWEI II handover algorithm takes the intersection from the candidate target cell lists corresponding to the handovers that meet the triggering condition, and then generates the final target cell list for the handover. Compared with common handover algorithms, HUAWEI II handover algorithm takes all results of handover decisions into account, obtaining more accurate results of handover decisions.

Enhancement 

GBSS14.0 A handover penalty inheritance mechanism is added to the load handover. When a load handover is successful, the penalty cell list from the source cell is inherited and therefore ping-pong handovers are prevented.

Dependency 

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


174


1 Basic Features

NA 

BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA






GBFD-110801 Processing of Measurement Report or GBFD-110802 Pre-processing of Measurement Report


GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover

1.10.38 GBFD-117101 BTS Power Lift for Handover Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS7.0.

Summary Before sending the handover command to the MS, the BSC adjusts the transmit power of the BTS to the maximum value to prevent call drops due to rapid level drop.


Reduces call drops, increases handover success rate, and optimizes KPIs.



Improves voice quality, prolongs call duration, and increases the operators' revenue.

Description During the call, if the receive level drops rapidly, the handover is triggered to avoid call drops. The power control algorithm, however, may fail to adjust the MS and BTS power in time. Therefore, the MS fails to receive the handover command, which then causes call drops. Using the BTS power lift for handover feature, the BSC can adjust the transmit power of the BTS to the maximum value before sending the handover command to the MS to prevent call drops due to rapid level drop.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


175


1 Basic Features

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA








1.10.39 GBFD-113501 A5/1 and A5/2 Ciphering Algorithm Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary This feature is used when the voice, data, and signaling of the user are transmitted over the Um interface.


An evident advantage of the GSM system over the analog system is that the unauthorized users are prohibited to access the network and the data of the authorized users is encrypted through sophisticated ciphering algorithm, ensuring the communication security.



The ciphering algorithm is referred to as A5 algorithm, which is a 114-bit ciphering sequence according to the GSM specifications. The GSM specifications define eight ciphering algorithms: A5/0-A5/7. With this feature, all the voice and signaling

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


176


1 Basic Features

information over the Um interface are transmitted in A5/1 or A5/2 ciphering mode. This ensures the network security.

Description The GSM specifications define eight ciphering algorithms: A5/0-CA5/7. A5/0 indicates "Not encrypted". With this feature, all the voice and signaling information over the Um interface are transmitted in A5/1 or A5/2 ciphering mode. This ensures the network security. 

Ciphering procedure The MSC uses the Cipher Mode CMD message (including the required ciphering algorithms and the key Kc) to initiate the ciphering procedure through the BSC. Then, according to the ciphering algorithm supported by the MS, the ciphering algorithm required by the MSC, and the ciphering algorithm allowed by the BSC, the BSC decides the algorithm to be used and notifies the BTS of the decision. The BSC then sends the Ciphering Mode CMD message to notify the MS of the ciphering algorithm. After receiving the Ciphering Mode CMD message, the MS initiates the transmission in ciphering mode.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA















Other NEs NA







1.10.40 GBFD-115505 AMR Radio Link Timer Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0. Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


177


1 Basic Features

Summary The radio link timer is used to detect the radio link quality. When the timer expires due to poor radio link quality, the system deactivates radio channels and interrupts the conversation. In this manner, the timer helps improve the channel efficiency and prevent poor-quality channels from occupying radio channels for a long time.


Prolongs the duration of the AMR voice service with high anti-interference capability and therefore reduces the call drop rate by setting the radio link timer separately for AMR and non-AMR voice services.



Improves user experience and increases the operators' revenue by prolonging the AMR call duration in the network with poor radio link quality.

Description This feature provides a special radio link timer for AMR calls. AMR calls enjoy higher robustness than common calls. When a common call fails due to poor radio link quality, the AMR voice service can maintain good conversation quality. If the radio link timers are set to the same value for an AMR call and a common call, the AMR call is likely to drop and user experience deteriorates. When this occurs, set the AMR radio link timer to a larger value so that the AMR call endures the poor radio environment, reducing the call drop rate. The radio link timers can be separately set for the AMR HR and the AMR FR.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA




Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


178




1 Basic Features


1.10.41 GBFD-113522 Encrypted Network Management Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.1.

Summary The encrypted network management is related to the secure socket layer (SSL). This feature allows the establishment of a TCP transmission channel between the network management server and a network element (NE) based on the encrypted SSL.


With the rapid development of the radio network, operators have higher requirements for the OM transmission security. Therefore, the encryption of the OM transmission channel becomes a basic requirement.



The encryption of the OM transmission channel involves the encryption of the data transmitted between the LMT and the NE and of the data transmitted between the BSC and the BTS.



This feature ensures the confidentiality of the data transmitted through the OM transmission channel, therefore effectively protecting the privacy of the subscriber data and reducing the risk that the transmitted plain text is intercepted.

Description In many scenarios of the communication between the network management system and the NE, a large amount of data is transmitted in the form of data files, including performance data file, log file, configuration data file, version file, and patch file. The traditional plain text transmission in the network is a threat to the secrecy of the transmitted data files. With the encrypted network management feature, a transmission channel based on the encrypted SSL is established between the network management server and the NE during the establishment of the TCP connection. The data is then transmitted over this encrypted channel.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


179


1 Basic Features

The encrypted network management feature supports the transmission of plain text and cipher text, and therefore does not affect the normal communication between the network management server and the NE that does not support the encrypted SSL.

This feature complies with RFC4217, and supports two SSL protocol versions, namely, SSL3.0 and TSL1.0.

Enhancement 

GBSS15.0 Encrypted Network Management between the network management server and GBTS(UMPT) is supported.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


180


1 Basic Features

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA










1.11 Interface Features 1.11.1 GBFD-111801 Ater Interface 4:1 Multiplexing Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary Huawei GBSC supports 4:1 multiplexing on the Ater interface. The previous PCM frame of 64 kbit/s can be converted into the TRAU frame of 16 kbit/s to save the transmission bandwidth.

Benefits During network deployment, the transmission cost takes up much of the investment. Assuming that the network quality is ensured, this feature can reduce the transmission bandwidth in the following ways: 

Through the configuration of the TC subrack on the MSC side (BM/TC separated mode), the compression multiplexing is implemented to save the transmission bandwidth and to reduce the transmission cost.



Operators can use the same amount of transmission investment to build a more reliable network.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


181


1 Basic Features

Description Huawei GBSC supports 4:1 multiplexing on the Ater interface. That is, the four timeslots on the E1 of the A interface can be multiplexed onto a timeslot on the Ater interface through the Ater interface processing board. In the telephone exchange network, the voice coding scheme is Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) and the rate is 64 kbit/s. To save the radio channel resources, the GSM system adopts the voice coding scheme RPE-LTP or CELP and the rate is 13 kbit/s (16 kbit/s for transmission). If the PSTN subscriber calls the GSM mobile subscriber, the voice codec is converted from 13 kbit/s codec to 64 kbit/s codec. The voice codec conversion is implemented in the TC (TRAU) unit. Before conversion, the voice signals are exchanged and transmitted on the channels of 16 kbit/s in the BSC. The Ater interface is an internal interface between the TC processing unit and the service processing module. On the Ater interface, Huawei GBSC supports the multiplexing of four voice channels to an E1 timeslot of 64 kbit/s. When the TC subrack is configured on the MSC side, the remote transmission resource can be saved by 75%. Huawei GBSC supports the configuration of the TC subrack on the BSC side or on the MSC side to provide the flexible networking for operators.

Enhancement 

GBSS7.0 Resource pool of the Ater interface: GBSS7.0 introduces the concept of the resource pool of the Ater interface. The links on the Ater interface used as a resource pool can be inconsistent with the CICs on the A interface. This feature supports the Ater timeslot of 8 kbit/s (require the support from GBFD-6901 Flex Ater): the timeslots on the Ater interface involves the timeslots of 16 kbit/s and 8 kbit/s. When a call connection is established, according to the service type, the Ater timeslots of 16 kbit/s are allocated if the TCHFs are allocated on the Um interface; the Ater timeslots of 8 kbit/s are allocated if the TCHHs are allocated on the Um interface. In this way, the resources on the Ater interface can be fully used and the resources can be saved by over 75%.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware The BSC6910 does not support this feature.









MS NA



CN NA

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


182




1 Basic Features

Other NEs NA







1.11.2 GBFD-119001 Gb Interface Function Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary This feature supports the processing of PS services in the BSC, that is, the built-in PCU function.


The Gb interface is introduced to Huawei GBSS, which can support the processing of PS services, that is, the built-in PCU function. The external PCU is not required. In this way, the network elements are greatly integrated, the occupied space is smaller, and the energy consumption is lower.



The processing specifications of the built-in PCU are greater than the processing specifications of the external PCU. This helps operators to process PS services in an efficient way.



The LMT is shared by the built-in PCU and the BSC. This reduces the O&M cost of operators.

Description For GBSS8.0 and later versions, PS services can be processed directly in the BSC, that is, the built-in PCU function. As a basic feature, the Gb interface is introduced to support uplink and downlink NS SDU transmission specified in the GSM specifications, load sharing, LLC PDU transmission, packet paging, radio access capability indication, radio access capability update, radio status indication, GPRS service suspension, recovery, Flush LL, flow control, and BSSGP Virtual Connection (BVC) blocking or reset.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware If a built-in PCU is used, a Gb interface board and a DPU board must to be configured.



BSC6910 Hardware NA

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


183




1 Basic Features







MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.11.3 GBFD-111803 A Interface Circuit Management Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary This feature is to control the maintenance of the single circuit of the terrestrial circuits or the whole PCM circuit group. When the TC subrack is configured on the BSC side, the circuit management of the A interface can be performed directly.

Benefits From the perspective of the O&M and transmission quality, the remote circuit management enables the operators to provide the value-added services for subscribers and enhances the network quality. Huawei GBSS provides all the functions of the circuit management on the LMT, facilitating the remote maintenance of the TC subrack such as the debugging and problem locating. Compared with the independent O&M of the TC subrack, this feature improves the efficiency of the O&M and reduces the O&M cost.

Description Huawei GBSC supports the circuit management of the A interface, which involves the circuit assignment, blocking, circuit group blocking, and unblocking of the A interface. This feature provides the following functions: 

Controls the maintenance of the single circuit of the terrestrial circuits or the whole PCM circuit group.



Provides the blocking or unblocking of the single circuit of the terrestrial circuits caused by the intervention of the LMT or equipment fault.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


184


1 Basic Features



Provides the blocking or unblocking of the circuit group of the terrestrial circuits caused by the intervention of the LMT or equipment fault.



Provides the message retransmission mechanism when the terrestrial circuit management message (circuit blocking, unblocking, or reset) is sent and no response is received within the predefined period.



Supports the uninstalled circuit function.

Circuit assignment of the A interface: During a call or the handover, the circuits of the A interface that are specified in the MSC signaling can be allocated and occupied. After the circuits are allocated and occupied, the BSC sends an Assignment Complete message to the MSC. Circuit blocking: When the circuit on the BSS side is unavailable, the BSC should notify the MSC that the circuit is changed to unavailable. This process uses the circuit blocking function. The message of the A interface blocking contains the circuit identification code (CIC) used by the circuits of the A interface. The status of the circuits on both sides of the A interface keeps consistent during the implementation of the circuit blocking function. Circuit unblocking: When the fault of the BSC is rectified or the circuit status is available, the BSC should notify the MSC of the change in the circuit status. The message of the A interface unblocking contains a circuit of the A interface, which is identified by the CIC. Circuit group blocking: When several circuits of the A interface need to be blocked, the command to block the circuit group is used. The command includes multiple A interface circuits, which are identified by the CICs. Circuit group unblocking: When several circuits of the A interface need to be unblocked, the command to unblock the circuit group is used. The command includes multiple A interface circuits, which are identified by the CICs. Uninstalled circuit: During the circuit blocking, unblocking, reset, assignment, incoming BSC handover, or BSC reset procedure, if the specified circuit does not exist, the BSC sends an uninstalled circuit message to the MSC. Circuit reset: When the local fault occurs on the system, use this function to restore the circuit status information of the BSC or MSC (for example, abnormal SCCP connection release). If a circuit becomes idle after abnormal SCCP connection release, the BSC notifies the MSC of its status.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


185


1 Basic Features

NA 










MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.11.4 GBFD-111804 A Interface Protocol Process Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary Huawei BSS supports the A interface-based signaling and protocol processing, which is a basic signaling function specified in the GSM specifications.

Benefits Huawei BSS supports the A interface-based signaling and protocol processing, which conforms to the international protocol. With this feature, Huawei BSS can be interconnected with the CN of other vendors that complies with the GSM specifications. In addition, operators can perform the evaluation and bidding in an efficient way, preventing monopoly and reducing the operation cost.

Description Huawei BSS implements the A interface-based signaling and protocol process, which supports the following functions: 

Connectionless and connection-oriented SCCP services



RR layer connection, MM layer connection and message sending



Transparent transmission of the DTAP message on the A interface



Incoming/outgoing handover



Internal handover



Handover candidate query

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


186


1 Basic Features



Paging procedure



Flow control



Traffic access control



Classmark update



Connection release



Encryption mode control process



MS message initialization



Data link control



Message check



Circuit group



Processing of abnormal SCCP connection



Queuing

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.11.5 GBFD-111805 A Interface Occupation Rate Monitoring Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


187


1 Basic Features

Summary This feature is to monitor the real-time status and usage of the circuits on the A interface and TC resources through performance measurement.

Benefits A interface occupation rate monitoring is an important feature for ensuring the network quality. This feature provides the following benefits for the operators: 

Learn the usage of the circuit resources of the A interface in time, providing a basis for the system capacity expansion.



Know about the distribution status of the circuit resources of the A interface in time. Coordinate the configuration of transmission resources among different networks. Add, reduce, and re-allocate the transmission resources on the basis of the usage of resources, reducing the network operation cost.



Find the defects of the network planning, improving the principles and methods of the existing network planning.

Description This feature is to monitor the usage of the circuits on the A interface and TC resources through performance measurement of the BSC. The reports on the occupation rate of the circuit on the A interface and TC resources make the operators know better about the usage of present resources. When the circuit occupation rate exceeds the preset threshold, the system will automatically report an alarm, reminding the user of expanding the capacity of the A interface according to the actual situation. The operators add or reduce the circuit resources of the A interface based on the usage of the circuit resources of the A interface, providing better services for subscribers.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA












MS NA



CN NA

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


188




1 Basic Features

Other NEs NA







1.11.6 GBFD-113904 Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary With this feature, the operator can deploy the network to provide radio services in the areas that are difficult to reach using conventional transmission.

Benefits This feature provides the following benefits: This feature enables the operator to deploy the BSS system to provide PS services in special geographical areas or emergency conditions. The satellite transmission resources over the Pb interface can be shared with other interfaces.

Description This feature enables the operator to deploy the network to provide radio services in the areas that are difficult to reach using conventional transmission. The PCU can be configured in the CN equipment room and shared by multiple BSCs.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA












MS NA

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


189




1 Basic Features

CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.11.7 GBFD-116901 Flex Ater Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS7.0.

Summary When the Flex Ater feature is enabled, the Ater resources are allocated according to the channel type during the call connection. If the TCHFs are allocated on the Um interface, the 16 kbit/s timeslots on the Ater interface are used. If the TCHHs are allocated on the Um interface, the 8 kbit/s timeslots on the Ater interface are used.

Benefits This feature effectively reduces the transmission investment on the Ater interface in remote TC networking. When the half rate accounts for 30% in the system, the Flex Ater-enabled network saves the Ater transmission resources by up to 15%, compared with the Flex Aterdisabled network.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


190


1 Basic Features

Description The Ater interface is an internal interface between the GMPS/GEPS and the GTCS in the Huawei BSS equipment. With this feature, the Ater resources are classified into 16 kbit/s timeslots and 8 kbit/s timeslots. The Flex Ater feature allocates the Ater resources according to the channel type during the call connection. If the TCHFs are allocated on the Um interface, the 16 kbit/s timeslots are used. If the TCHHs are allocated on the Um interface, the 8 kbit/s timeslots are used. Therefore, the Ater resources are fully utilized. The user can determine the initial proportions of the 16 kbit/s timeslots and the 8 kbit/s timeslots based on the traffic module. If either type of resources is insufficient, the BSC dynamically adjusts the Ater resources. If the 16 kbit/s timeslots are insufficient, two continuous 8 kbit/s timeslots are incorporated into one 16 kbit/s timeslot. Similarly, if the 8 kbit/s timeslots are insufficient, one 16 kbit/s timeslot is divided into two 8 kbit/s timeslots. The adjustment process is recorded in the traffic statistics. In addition, the user can query using the LMT the number of the 16 kbit/s and 8 kbit/s timeslots of a specific subrack and the usage of these timeslots. Based on the query result, the user can determine whether the initial proportions of 16 kbit/s and 8 kbit/s timeslots are proper or the Ater resources are congested. When this feature is enabled and the transmission resources on the Ater interface are insufficient, the BSC preferentially allocates the half rate to alleviate the congestion, increasing the system capacity.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA












MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


191


1 Basic Features

1.12 PS Services Features 1.12.1 GBFD-119101 Packet Channel Combination Type Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary This feature supports the packet channel combination type specified in the GSM specifications.


This feature supports the packet channel combination type specified in the GSM specifications.



According to the actual situation, operators determine whether to activate the PBCCH. Then, adjust the rate of the PDTCH in a flexible way to perform the network planning properly.

Description According to 3GPP TS 43.064, the packet channel is classified into the following types: 

Packet Broadcast Control Channel (PBCCH) The PBCCH is used only on the downlink. It broadcasts specific system information. If the PBCCH is not available, the BCCH takes the roles of system information broadcasting.



Packet Common Control Channel(PCCCH) The PCCCH is the logical channel of common control signaling of the packet data. It is classified into the following channel types: PRACH, PPCH, and PAGCH. Packet Random Access Channel (PRACH): It is used only on the uplink. The MS requests to allocate the PDTCH on this channel. Packet Paging Channel (PPCH): It is used only on the downlink. The BSS pages the MS through the PPCH. The paging group functionality is applied to the PPCH, and the DRX is also supported. The PPCH can be used for paging in CS services as well as in PS services. However, the paging in CS services is applicable to only Class A MS and Class B MS. When the MS is operating in packet transmission mode, the PACCH can be used to page the MS that performs the CS services. Packet Access Grant Channel (PAGCH): It is used only on the downlink. Before the MS starts packet transmission, the PAGCH transmits the allocated resources to the MS, enabling the packet transmission. In addition, when the MS is operating in packet transmission mode, the PACCCH can be used to transmit the allocated resources to the MS on the downlink.



Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Packet Data Traffic Channel (PDTCH): Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

192


1 Basic Features

It is used for the data transmission in PS mode. In multislot mode, an MS can use multiple PDTCHs to transfer data. Packet Dedicated Control Channel (PDCCH): It is classified into the PTCCH and the PACCH. 

Packet Timing Advance Control Channel (PTCCH) It is used to control the timing advance of the MS.



Packet Associated Control Channel (PACCH) It is used to transfer the signaling information. The signaling information consists of the verification and the power control information. The PACCH also carries the information about resource allocation and re-allocation, enabling the capacity allocation of the PDTCHs or the addition of PACCHs in future. A PACCH can be allocated to one or multiple PDTCHs of an MS. This feature supports the following channel combination: Combined PDTCH: PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH. It is recommended that the PBCCH and PCCCH not be configured. This is because the descriptions about PBCCH and PCCCH have been deleted from 3GPP TS 43.064, 45.001, 45.002, 45.008, 44.018, and 44.060 since Release 9.

Enhancement 

GBSS8.1 Supports the PBCCH or PCCCH. The following channel combinations are supported: Combined PBCCH: PBCCH+PCCCH+PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH Combined PCCCH: PCCCH+PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH

Dependency 




BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA






GBFD-114101 GPRS

−

GBFD-114201 EGPRS


Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


193


1 Basic Features

1.12.2 GBFD-119102 Packet System Information Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary This feature supports the message types of the packet system information specified in the GSM specifications.


This feature supports the message types of the packet system information specified in the GSM specifications and provides the packet access service.



Operators adjust the configuration parameters related to the packet system information in a flexible way to control the operation of the network and the MS. For example, the network operation mode enabled by the BSC and the access pulse type of the MS.

Description Packet System Information (PSI) contains the primary radio network parameters of the Um interface such as network identification parameters, cell selection parameters, system control parameters, and network function parameters. The reception of the system information enables the MS to select and access the network properly and to fully utilize multiple services provided by the network. The messages of the packet system information are transmitted on the BCCH or the SACCH. The GPRS service support indication is carried in SI3, SI4, SI7 or SI8, and the parameters related to the GPRS services are carried in SI13. The DTM support information is carried in SI6. SI13 is broadcast on the BCCH provided that the cell supports GPRS services. The configuration of the PBCCH is optional for a cell. SI13 is received by the MS, indicating whether the PBCCH is configured in a cell. The PBCCH mainly broadcasts the messages of the GPRS packet system information. Messages of the packet system information are PSI1, PSI2, PSI3, PSI3bis, and PSI13. PSI1: Mainly contains the information about the cell selection, PRACH control, control channel, and power control parameter. PSI2: Mainly contains the information such as the reference frequency list, cell allocation table, GPRS mobile allocation table, and PCCCH description. PSI3: Mainly contains the information about the BCCH allocation list of the neighboring cell and cell selection parameters of the serving cell and non-serving cell. PSI3bis: Mainly contains the information about the BCCH allocation list of the neighboring cell and cell selection parameters of the non-serving cell. PSI13: Like SI13 broadcast on the BCCH, this message mainly contains the access-related information associated with the GPRS cells. PSI1-CPSI3: These messages can be broadcast on the PBCCH or the PACCH. PSI13 can be broadcast only on the PACCH. Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


194


1 Basic Features

If the PBCCH is available in a cell, then the PSI13 is not broadcast on the PACCH. In the case of the MS in the transmission state, PSI1 is periodically broadcast on the PACCH. If the PBCCH is not available in a cell, then only PSI13 is periodically broadcast on the PACCH. Huawei BSS allows the transmission of all GPRS-related system information, enabling the controlling retransmission, high-speed retransmission, and low-speed retransmission of the system information. In addition, Huawei BSS controls the transmission of the system information on the PACCH based on the actual configuration of the PBCCH or the PCCCH in a cell.

Enhancement 

GBSS8.1 The DTM support information is carried in SI6.

Dependency 




BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA






GBFD-114101 GPRS

−

GBFD-114201 EGPRS


1.12.3 GBFD-119103 MS Types Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary This feature supports the MS types specified in the GSM specifications.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


195


1 Basic Features


This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS services.



This feature supports different types of the MSs specified in the GSM specifications to perform PS services.

Description Huawei BSC supports the following MS types: Class A MS: The class A MS supports simultaneous attach of GPRS and IMSI, and the MS supports simultaneous operation of GPRS and CS services. Class B MS: The class B MS supports simultaneous attach of GPRS and IMSI, but the MS can perform only one service at a time. Class C MS: The class C MS can access only the GSM or GPRS network at a certain time. If the MS supports both PS and CS services, the services can be only switched over manually and cannot be implemented simultaneously.

Enhancement None

Dependency 




BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA



Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


GBFD-114101 GPRS

−

GBFD-114201 EGPRS Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

196




1 Basic Features


1.12.4 GBFD-119104 MAC Mode Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary This feature supports the MAC mode specified in the GSM specifications.





This feature supports the MAC mode specified in the GSM specifications. After the MS accesses the network, the USF is scheduled to ensure that the PS services of the MS are processed continuously and multiple MSs can be multiplexed on a PDCH.

Description Huawei GBSS supports two MAC modes: dynamic allocation and extended dynamic allocation. This feature supports dynamic allocation. 

Dynamic allocation The MS in the ready state obtains the USF information by decoding RLC/MAC headers, and then determines whether an uplink radio block or a group of uplink radio blocks are used to transmit data on the PDCH during the period of transmitting the next block. In this way, the BSS can control the uplink access of multiple MSs on a timeslot.

Enhancement None

Dependency 




BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


197


1 Basic Features

NA 

Other NEs NA




GBFD-114101 GPRS

−

GBFD-114201 EGPRS

−

GBFD-119401 EDA Extended dynamic allocation requires GBFD-119401 EDA.




1.12.5 GBFD-119105 RLC Mode Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary This feature supports the RLC mode specified in the GSM specifications.





This feature determines the RLC mode and establishes PS services based on the information contained in the uplink packet resource request sent by the MS or LLC PDU sent by the CN.

Description Two RLC modes are supported: RLC acknowledged mode and RLC unacknowledged mode. The RLC mode of the uplink TBF is dependent on the type of the service requested by the MS; the RLC mode of the downlink TBF, however, is dependent on the RLC mode of the QoS parameters contained in the downlink LLC PDU. RLC acknowledged mode: In this mode, the receiver acknowledges the received RLC data blocks, and each data block transmitted on the TBF should be acknowledged; otherwise, the sender shall resend the lost blocks. Each data block transmitted on the TBF should be acknowledged until the transmission of all the data is complete and acknowledged. In this case, the TBF can be released. This mechanism ensures the transmission reliability of the RLC data blocks. RLC unacknowledged mode: In this mode, the receiving party acknowledges the received RLC data blocks as in RLC acknowledged mode. The data block, however, does not require the acknowledgment from the sending party. The lost data or erroneously transmitted data are replaced by filling bits. After the data transmission is complete, the TBF can be released.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


198


1 Basic Features

Enhancement None

Dependency 




BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA






GBFD-114101 GPRS

−

GBFD-114201 EGPRS


1.12.6 GBFD-119106 Coding Scheme Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary This feature supports the GPRS CS coding schemes specified in the GSM specifications.





This feature supports GPRS CS-1 and CS-2 specified in the GSM specifications.

Description According to GSM specifications, the GPRS can use four coding schemes: CS-1, CS-2, CS-3, and CS-4. CS-1 and CS-2 have a data rate of 9.05 kbit/s and 13.4 kbit/s (containing the header Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


199


1 Basic Features

of the RLC block). This ensures 100% and 90% cell coverage, meeting the co-channel interference requirement of C/I = 9 dB. The requirements for the radio transmission quality vary with the transmission rate of the coding schemes. The higher the transmission rate, the higher the requirements for the radio transmission quality. The half-rate and 1/3 rate bits in the RLC blocks of CS-1 and CS-2 are used for the forward error correction (FEC). Therefore, the C/I requirement is reduced. During the data transmission, the BSC dynamically adjusts the channel coding or decoding mode according to the retransmission rate of the RLC blocks transmitted on the uplink or downlink TBF. This improves the transmission rate on the basis of guaranteed transmission quality, fully utilizing the radio resources. This feature supports CS-1, CS-2, and dynamic adjustment between CS-1 and CS-2.

Enhancement None

Dependency 




BSC6910 Hardware NA












CN NA



Other NEs NA






GBFD-114101 GPRS

−

GBFD-114201 EGPRS


1.12.7 GBFD-119107 Networking Control Mode Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary This feature supports the network control mode specified in the GSM specifications. Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


200


1 Basic Features





This feature supports the network control mode specified in the GSM specifications. Operators can adjust the network control mode according to the different cell reselection policies.

Description The following describes three network control modes in cell reselection concerning the relationships between the MS, network, and MR. NC0: In this mode, the MS performs autonomous cell reselection without sending the MR to the network. NC1: In this mode, the MS performs autonomous cell reselection and sends the MR to the network. NC2: In this mode, the network controls the cell reselection and the MS sends the MR to the network. In this case, the MS does not perform autonomous cell reselection. This feature supports both NC0 and NC1.

Enhancement None

Dependency 




BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA






GBFD-114101 GPRS

−

GBFD-114201 EGPRS


Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


201


1 Basic Features

1.12.8 GBFD-119108 Network Operation Mode Support Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary This feature supports Network Operation Mode II and Network Operation Mode III specified in the GSM specifications.





This feature supports Network Operation Mode II and Network Operation Mode III specified in the GSM specifications. In this way, operators can adjust the network operation mode according to different networking modes and paging policies.

Description The GSM specifications define three network operation modes according to the paging mode adopted for CS and GPRS services: Network Operation Mode I, Network Operation Mode II, and Network Operation Mode III. Network Operation Mode I: The BSS sends the CS paging message and the PS paging message to the GPRS-attached MS on the PCH of the CCCH or the PPCH of the PCCCH. In this case, the MS listens to only the PCH or the PPCH. If the PDCH is allocated to the MS, then the BSS sends a CS paging message to the MS on this channel provided that the Gs interface is used and the paging coordination function is enabled. Network Operation Mode II: The BSS sends the CS paging message and the PS paging message to the GPRS-attached MS on the PCH of the CCCH. In this case, the MS listens to only the PCH of the CCCH and the paging coordination function is not required. Network Operation Mode III: The BSS sends a CS paging message to the GPRS-attached MS on the PCH of the CCCH. If a PPCH is configured in a cell, the PS paging message is sent on this channel. Otherwise, the PS paging message is sent on the PCH of the CCCH. If a PPCH is configured in a cell, the MS should listen to the CS paging channel and PS paging channel simultaneously. In this case, the paging coordination function is not required. Network Operation Mode

CS Paging Message

GPRS Paging Message

Paging Coordination

I

PPCH

PPCH

Required

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


202


1 Basic Features

Network Operation Mode

CS Paging Message

GPRS Paging Message

Paging Coordination

PCH

PCH

PACCH

Not used

II

PCH

PCH

Not required

III

PCH

PPCH

Not required

PCH

PCH

The network operation mode is sent to the MS through the system information. In addition, the network operation modes should be consistent in a routing area (RA).

Enhancement None

Dependency 




BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA






GBFD-114101 GPRS

−

GBFD-114201 EGPRS


1.12.9 GBFD-119109 QoS (Best Effort) Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0. Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


203


1 Basic Features

Summary This feature supports the quality of service (QoS) (Best Effort) specified in the GSM specifications.





This feature allocates more resources to the MS, and improves the packet throughput of the MS, meeting the requirements of the QoS.

Description The Quality of Service (QoS) of the GPRS network contains the following specifications: priority, delay level, reliability level, peak throughput level, average throughput level, and guaranteed bit rate. Each specification can be further divided into multiple levels. These specifications are end-to-end requirements of the entire packet data transfer. The specifications involve the radio resources, trunk link resources on the Gb interface or IP transmission resource, transmission bandwidth of the GPRS backbone network, and processing capability of different GPRS devices. Huawei BSC6000 allocates more resources to the MS with best effort QoS. In addition, the BSC6000 adopts the polling scheduling mode to balance the bandwidth for multiple MSs that are multiplexed on a packet channel.

Enhancement None

Dependency 




BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA




Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

GBFD-114101 GPRS Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

204


− 

1 Basic Features

GBFD-114201 EGPRS


1.12.10 GBFD-119110 Access Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary This feature supports the packet access specified in the GSM specifications.





This feature supports the packet access initiated by the MS that is specified in the GSM specifications.

Description The RLC/MAC layer of an MS initiates a packet access if the MS needs to transmit data. The packet access of an MS has the following types: short access, one-phase access, two-phase access, and single block access without TBF establishment. 

Access type selection If less than eight RLC blocks are transmitted, the channel request type of the MS is short access. The number of blocks should be calculated on the basis of CS-1. If more than eight RLC blocks are transmitted and the requested RLC mode is the acknowledged mode, the channel request type of the MS should be one-phase access or two-phase access. If the data to be sent is an MR, then the channel request type of the MS should be single block access without TBF establishment. The following channel request types are also defined: paging response, cell update, and mobility management. These channel request types are generally processed in one-phase access or two-phase access manner.



Access procedure Short access and one-phase access: Radio resources such as TFI and USF are allocated to the MS after the BSS receives a Packet Channel Request message. Two-phase access: A radio block is allocated to the MS after the BSS receives a Packet Channel Request message. The MS sends a Packet Resource Request message on the allocated radio block to request resources. Upon reception of this message, the BSS allocates resources such as TFI and USF to the MS. Then, the MS sends data on the allocated resources. The Packet Channel Request message is an 8-bit or 11-bit access burst, which carries a small amount of information. The Packet Resource Request message, however, is an RLC/MAC signaling packet in CS-1 coding scheme. Therefore, the two-phase access can carry relatively more information (including the TLLI, multislot capability of the MS, and radio priority). This helps allocate appropriate resources to the MS.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


205


1 Basic Features

Enhancement None

Dependency 




BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA






GBFD-114101 GPRS

−

GBFD-114201 EGPRS


1.12.11 GBFD-119111 Assignment Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary This feature supports the packet assignment procedure specified in the GSM specifications.





This feature supports the PS services initiated by the network or MS.

Description The packet assignment is a process for allocating packet radio resources to the MS and establishing TBF. Huawei BSS supports the uplink or downlink assignment on the CCCH or PACCH. Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


206


1 Basic Features

Uplink assignment on the CCCH: When the MS in packet idle mode (no TBF available) initiates an uplink access, the BSS allocates resources to the MS to establish an uplink TBF after receiving a Packet Channel Request message (one-phase access) or a Packet Resource Request (two-phase access) on the CCCH. Uplink assignment on the PACCH: When the MS is in downlink packet transfer mode, it sends a DOWNLINK ACK message containing the uplink channel request to request the establishment of the TBF. Upon reception of this message, the BSS allocates resources to the MS to establish an uplink TBF. Downlink assignment on the CCCH: When the MS is in packet idle mode (no TBF available), the BSS allocates resources to the MS on the CCCH to establish the downlink TBF after receiving an LLC PDU that is sent from the SGSN to the MS. Downlink assignment on the PACCH: When the MS is in uplink packet transfer mode (uplink TBF available), the BSS allocates resources to the MS on the PACCH to establish the downlink TBF after receiving an LLC PDU that is sent from the SGSN to the MS.

Enhancement None

Dependency 




BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA






GBFD-114101 GPRS

−

GBFD-114201 EGPRS


Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


207


1 Basic Features

1.12.12 GBFD-119112 PS Paging Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary This feature supports the GPRS PS paging procedure specified in the GSM specifications.





This feature supports the basic GPRS PS paging procedure, which can establish a packet call initiated by the network.

Description When the downlink data is sent to the MS, the SGSN needs to initiate a PS paging procedure to accurately locate the MS. The SGSN sends a paging request message to the BSC on the Gb interface. Then, the BSC converts this message into the Packet Paging Request message and sends it to the MS. If the PCCCH is available in the BSC, this message is sent on the PPCH; if the PCCCH is not available in the BSC, this message is sent on the PCH. Upon reception of the Packet Paging Request message, the MS initiates the procedure for establishing an uplink TBF. Then, the MS sends the paging response packet in data form to the BSC on the Um interface and the BSC forwards it to the SGSN. After the SGSN receives the paging response packet, the downlink data is transmitted provided that the paging response packet is processed. 

PS paging on the CCCH In Network Operation Mode II, the PS paging is sent on the CCCH. In Network Operation Mode III, the PS paging is sent on the CCCH if the PCCCH is not configured in the cell.



CS paging on the CCCH In Network Operation Mode II or Network Operation Mode III, the CS paging is sent on the CCCH.

This feature supports the paging in Network Operation Mode II and Network Operation Mode III.

Enhancement None

Dependency 


Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


208




1 Basic Features

BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs To implement paging coordination, the MSC must support the Gs interface.






GBFD-114101 GPRS

−

GBFD-114201 EGPRS


1.12.13 GBFD-119113 Timing Advance Update Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary This feature supports the timing advance (TA) update procedure specified in the GSM specifications.





This feature supports the basic TA update procedure to ensure that the MS can obtain the correct TA and keep the continuity of the packet call.



The TA is a basis for the feature of the packet concentric cell handover.

Description Huawei BSC6000 supports the continual TA update on the packet timing advanced control channel (PTCCH). In the uplink or downlink assignment message, the BSC allocates TAI to the MS to identify the PTCCH. The MS periodically sends a random access burst on the specified uplink PTCCH and the BSS obtains the TA from the burst and sends it to the MS on the downlink PTCCH. During the initial establishment of the TA, the BSS obtains the TA from the Packet Channel Request message sent by the MS, and sends the Packet Uplink/Downlink Assignment Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


209


1 Basic Features

message containing the TA to the MS. The MS uses this TA until the continual timing advance update procedure is complete and a new TA is obtained. TA of packet downlink assignment: If no valid TA can be obtained through the downlink assignment, the BSS sends the packet POLLING message and obtains the TA from the random access burst that is used by the MS.

Enhancement None

Dependency 




BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA






GBFD-114101 GPRS

−

GBFD-114201 EGPRS


1.12.14 GBFD-119115 Power Control Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary This feature supports the uplink open-loop power control procedure specified in the GSM specifications.

Benefits This feature provides the following benefits:

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


210


1 Basic Features






This feature supports the uplink open-loop power control procedure specified in the GSM specifications.



Based on the adjustment of the parameter configuration, operators can reduce the MS power consumption and interference in an efficient way and improve the system capacity.

Description This feature improves the usage of frequencies, increases the system capacity, and reduces the power consumption of the MS. Because there is no continuous bi-directional connection during the transmission of packet data, the power control of the GPRS is more complex. Huawei BSC6000 provides the uplink open-loop power control algorithm. The formula of the algorithm complies with 3GPP TS 45.008. The basic principle of the open-loop power control is to assume that the path loss in the uplink is the same as the path loss in the downlink. Therefore, the MS can adjust the output power based on the receive level.

Enhancement None

Dependency 




BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA






GBFD-114101 GPRS

−

GBFD-114201 EGPRS


Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


211


1 Basic Features

1.12.15 GBFD-119116 Packet Uplink Flow Control Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary This feature is to effectively control the random access on the PRACH or the RACH by prolonging the retransmission interval of the random accesses or prohibiting the access of the MSs of a certain access class.





This feature ensures the capacity of the BSC and the service quality on the basis of the reasonable flow control of the random access on the PRACH or the RACH.

Description If excessive MSs request GPRS resources within a cell or BSC at the same time, the GPRS resources may be insufficient and the uplink may be congested. The uplink flow control is used to control the service requests (including the response to paging) that are initiated by the MS, and to delay the response to these service requests. The control of uplink service requests is implemented through the control of the number of random access requests on the PRACH/RACH. The delay of the response to the service requests initiated by the MS is implemented in the queue indication procedure. Decreasing the number of random access requests on the PRACH/RACH is implemented through prolonging the random access retransmission interval or prohibiting the access of the MSs of a certain class. Prolonging the retransmission interval of the random access may affect the response speed and service quality of the system but it helps improve the capacity of the system. Therefore, it is applicable to some suitable situations. Prohibiting the MSs of a certain access class may affect the service quality of the system. In addition, Huawei BSC6000 handles the overload in a policy from the service perspective and the operation perspective. For different types of overloads, there are different handling policies. For example, for the overload of radio resources, the system reduces the load to be processed on the basis of priorities by performing the following steps until the overload problem is solved: 

Delay the response to the access request with low QoS or reject the access request with low QoS.



Release the TBF of the MS with low QoS.



Take turns to block the MSs of a certain class from accessing the network.



212


1 Basic Features

Dependency 




BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA






GBFD-111705 GSM Flow Control


1.12.16 GBFD-119117 Flow Control on Gb Interface Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary This feature supports the procedure for the flow control on the Gb interface.





On the basis of the flow control policy of the Gb interface and the parameter configuration, this feature prevents frequent data loss caused by the congestion on the Gb interface or the transmission interruption caused by insufficient flow.



This feature enhances the user experience and ensures the packet throughput of the BSS.

Description Because the physical media and transmission protocols on the Gb interface are different from those on the Um interface, the two interfaces have different data transmission rates. The data rate on the Gb interface is greater than that on the Um interface. In addition, the data transmission rate in the downlink on the Um interface is subject to various factors such as the multislot capability of the MS, radio quality, and radio channels available in the cell. In Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


213


1 Basic Features

addition, the data transmission rate is unstable. Therefore, the flow control of downlink data is required. When the cell status is normal, the BSC initiates the flow control procedure. The BSC reports the bucket size and rate of the cell according to the radio packet channels in the cell. In addition, the BSC reports the bucket size and rate of the MS according to the resource occupation of the MS. Based on the reported parameters, the SGSN adjusts the downlink data rates of the cell and of each MS to implement the flow control. The bucket of a cell refers to the maximum packet data storage space that is reserved for the cell. The bucket varies according to the number of packet channels in the cell. The bucket of an MS refers to the maximum packet data storage space that is reserved for the MS. The bucket varies according to the number of channels that are allocated to the MS. When the cell status is normal, the BSC initiates the flow control procedure. The BSC reports the bucket size and rate of the cell according to the radio packet channels in the cell. In addition, the BSC reports the bucket size and rate of the MS according to the resource occupation of the MS. Based on the reported parameters, the SGSN adjusts the downlink data rates of the cell and of each MS to implement the flow control. The bucket rate refers to the data transmission rate. The BSC can perform data flow control in the downlink. It periodically reports the bucket sizes and rates of the current cell and of an MS to the SGSN and adjusts the reported parameters based on the changes in cell packet resources and in the resource occupation of the MS. Downlink flow control involves downlink BVC flow control and downlink MS flow control: 

Downlink BVC flow control: The BSC reports flow control parameters, such as the maximum bucket size and the leak rate of the BVC, to the SGSN.



Downlink MS flow control: The SGSN reports flow control parameters, such as the maximum bucket size and the leak rate of the MS, to the SGSN.

Enhancement None

Dependency 




BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


214




1 Basic Features

Other NEs NA






GBFD-114101 GPRS

−

GBFD-114201 EGPRS


1.12.17 GBFD-113101 PDCH Dynamic Adjustment Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary With this feature, fixed channels do not need to be configured for the PS services, the TCH and the PDCH can be automatically converted as required.


Reduces the impact of GPRS services on the GSM speech services, decreases the maintenance and configuration workload, and increases channel usage and network capacity.



Improves the performance of the PS services and increases the operators' revenue.



Packet channel types

Description The PDCH is classified into static PDCH and dynamic PDCH based on the bearer services (CS services or PS services). The static PDCH is used for the PS services only. The dynamic PDCH is a TCH during the initialization process. In the case of packet access, the TCH and the PDCH can be dynamically converted. 

PDCH dynamic adjustment The static PDCH is used for the PS services only. The dynamic PDCH is a TCH during the initialization process. When the packet resources are insufficient, the PCU requests dynamic PDCHs from the BSC for the PS services. When the circuit resources are insufficient, the BSC requests dynamic PDCHs that are used as TCHs from the PCU. In this manner, the channel resources are flexibly used as required. Therefore, the usage of resources is increased, and the complexity of PDCH configuration and the workload of maintenance and configuration are reduced. In addition, the impact of unreasonable PDCH configuration on the service performance is reduced.

Enhancement 

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

GBSS7.0


215


1 Basic Features

PDCH Preemption Priority: In the latter period of the GSM network development, the requirements for the PS services are preferentially met because of the significant increase in the data service demand. Huawei PCU equipment supports three types of PDCH preemption priorities: all dynamic channels preemptable, packet control channels unpreemptable, and all dynamic channels carrying services unpreemptable. This application enhancement optimizes the performance of the PS services by limiting channel preemption of the CS services. The operators can implement different packet allocation strategies by configuring preemption priority. All dynamic channels preemptable: The CS services can preempt all dynamic channels. Packet control channels unpreemptable: The CS services can preempt all the other dynamic channels except the packet control channels. All dynamic channels carrying services unpreemptable: The CS services cannot preempt all the dynamic channels carrying services. 

GBSS8.0 Overall Dynamic PDCH Availability: Except for static PDCHs, all the other channels can be converted in real time based on the situation of the PS services and the CS services. If required, TCHs can be converted to PDCHs for the PS services. With this application enhancement, more PDCHs can be converted when the CS services are not busy. This can alleviate the decrease in the transmission rate due to PDCH multiplexing. This flexible mechanism can maximize the channel usage and optimize the distribution of PDCHs and TCHs. In addition, the network planning is simple and therefore you can expand the capacity if required.

Dependency 




BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA






GBFD-114101 GPRS

−

GBFD-114201 EGPRS


Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


216


1 Basic Features

1.12.18 GBFD-119205 Dynamically Adjusting the RRBP Frequency Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary With this feature, the relative reserved block period (RRBP) frequency is dynamically adjusted according to the status of the uplink TBF and the downlink TBF. The data blocks with the RRBP flag in the downlink are sent at different intervals.


Optimizes the uplink access rate of PS services, improving the performance of the TCP services such as FTP downloading by increasing the rate of sending the TCP ACK message. As a result, user experience is enhanced.



Reduces unnecessary data flow in the uplink and the impact on other users on the same PDCH.

Description This feature optimizes the RRBP frequency based on the whether uplink TBF exists during the delayed downlink TBF release. 

Uplink TBF status and RRBP frequency During the downlink transmission process, the BSC periodically sends data blocks with RRBP flag to reserve uplink resources for the MS to respond with the PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK message to report the receiving status of the downlink data. When the MS needs to send data in the uplink but the uplink TBF does not exist, the MS can carry the channel request information in the PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK message to initiate the access. Therefore, if the frequency of sending the data blocks with RRBP flag is increased at this time, the access rate of the MS can be increased. On the other hand, the PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK message seizes the uplink bandwidth. Therefore, when the uplink TBF already exists, the uplink expenditure is reduced and the uplink data bandwidth is increased if the frequency of sending the data blocks with RRBP flag is reduced. This feature dynamically adjusts the frequency for sending the data blocks with the RRBP flag based on whether the uplink TBF exists during the delayed downlink TBF release. If the uplink TBF exists and the downlink TBF is in the delayed release state after the data transmission in the downlink is complete, the BSS uses a low frequency to save the uplink bandwidth. If the uplink TBF does not exist, there is less data to be sent in the uplink. At this time, the BSS uses a high frequency to increase the uplink access rate of the MS.

Enhancement None

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


217


1 Basic Features

Dependency 




BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.12.19 GBFD-119303 Load Sharing Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary Based on the traffic load on the PDCHs, load sharing applies to the dynamic adjustment of the MS distribution on the PDCHs to improve the channel utilization and single-user PS service rate.

Benefits This feature helps improve the channel utilization and PS service rate.

Description The strategy for load sharing includes the following three parts: When an MS accesses the network, the system preferentially assigns a TRX with a light load to the MS to adjust the load distribution between TRXs. When the MS provides PS services, the system assigns the MS a PDCH or PDCHs with a light load. The occupancy of channel resources varies during the transmission. For example, if the MS releases channel resources when the service ends, some TRXs or PDCHs are idle. If the MS accessing the network is not shifted from the channel with heavy load to the channel with a light load, the channel resources are wasted. According to the load on the PDCHs, the Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


218


1 Basic Features

BSS shifts the MS carried on the PDCH with a heavy load to the one with a light load. Therefore, load sharing is implemented and the single-user rate increases. When the channel is released, the system adjusts the load distribution between channels according to the traffic load on each channel to ensure load balance on the PDCHs, optimally utilizing channel resources.

Enhancement 

GBSS8.1 Load sharing during the release of radio resources: This function enhances the load balance between TRXs when radio resources are released. Therefore, the resources on all the TRXs are reassigned in the cell. That is, the MSs carried on the TRXs with a heavy load are assigned to those with a light load, and then the MSs carried on the PDCHs with a heavy load are assigned to those with a light load so that the load balance between all the TRXs in the cell is realized and the channel resources are optimally utilized. For example, an MS transmits data for a long time. During the data transmission, if radio resources are released by other MSs, the BSC determines whether the TRX used by the MSs that release radio resources are idle. If the TRX is idle, the MS performing longtime data transmission is reassigned with the channels on the idle TRX. Therefore, the throughput of the MS is increased. When the traffic load of the GPRS channels decreases, some GPRS MSs are shifted from the EGPRS channel to the GPRS channels to increase the channel utilization and minimize the impact on the EGPRS services.

Dependency 




BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA






GBFD-114101 GPRS

−

GBFD-114201 EGPRS


Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


219


1 Basic Features

1.12.20 GBFD-119501 Adaptive Adjustment of Uplink and Downlink Channels Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary The uplink and downlink channel adaptive adjustment implements dynamic assignment of the number of uplink and downlink channels for the MSs based on the uplink and downlink service data flow.

Benefits In the case of the services that are processed on both the uplink and downlink such as ping large packets and Push to Talk over Cellular (PoC), this feature helps to reduce the system transmission delay. In the case of the downlink-preferred services such as FTP download, this feature helps improve the downlink data throughput. In the case of the uplink-preferred services such as e-mail sending, this feature, used together with extended dynamic allocation (EDA), helps improve the uplink data throughput.

Description The BSS measures the data throughput of uplink and downlink of each temporary block flow (TBF) regularly to determine the current service type of the TBF. If the downlink-preferred service is performed, the BSS assigns as many downlink timeslots as possible to the MS. For an MS with multislot class of 12, the BSS uses the 4+1 DL/UL timeslot configuration preferentially. If the uplink-preferred service is performed, the BSS assigns as many uplink timeslots as possible to the MS. For an MS with multislot class of 12, the BSS uses the 1+4 DL/UL timeslot configuration preferentially used together with EDA. If the service processed on both the uplink and downlink is performed, the BSS tries to assign the timeslots of uplink and downlink asymmetrically to the MS. For an MS with multislot class of 12, the BSS uses the 3+2 DL/UL timeslot configuration preferentially.

Enhancement None

Dependency 




BSC6910 Hardware NA




Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


220




1 Basic Features




MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA






GBFD-114101 GPRS

−

GBFD-114201 EGPRS


1.12.21 GBFD-119203 Extended Uplink TBF Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary This feature ensures that the TBF is not released when no data is transmitted. In this manner, the TBF does not need to be re-established after the data is transmitted again. Therefore, frequent TBF establishment and releases are avoided.

Benefits This feature reduces the cost for establishing the uplink TBF, shortens the data transmission time in the uplink, and increases the uplink rate.

Description After the uplink data is sent, the common uplink TBF is released immediately whereas the extended uplink TBF enters the inactive period. If there is new data to be transmitted, the TBF in inactive period enters the active period for data transmission. If the inactive period timer expires and there is no data to be transmitted, the TBF is released. The inactive period timer is an adjustable parameter pertaining to network optimization. With this feature, the throughput rate of the services with unstable data flow such as webpage browsing and email sending is improved.

Enhancement 

GBSS14.0 This feature adaptively adjusts the frequency for sending PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK messages. During downloading services, TCP ACK messages (which are very short), are frequently transmitted on the uplink. When an MS in extended uplink TBF mode is downloading data, the BSC does not send a PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK message to the MS upon

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


221


1 Basic Features

receiving a TCP ACK message. Instead, the BSC sends a PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK message to the MS only after receiving a certain number of TCP ACK messages. This decreases the overhead of downlink signaling in extended uplink TBF mode, increasing the downloading speed. The frequency for sending PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK messages is determined by one of the network optimization parameters. This feature provides the following benefits: Increases the throughput of downloading services effectively. Decreases the signaling load on control channels from 19% to 2%. Increases the downloading rate by 5% when an MS uses four PDCHs exclusively to perform downloading services.

Dependency 




BSC6910 Hardware NA












CN NA



Other NEs NA






GBFD-114101 GPRS

−

GBFD-114201 EGPRS


1.13 Antenna System Solution 1.13.1 MRFD-210601 Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier) Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


222


1 Basic Features

Summary This feature provides a solution to the TMA connection. Huawei MBTS complies with the AISG1.1 and AISG2.0 protocols.

Benefits In the uplink coverage-limited network, the use of the TMA can improve the receiver sensitivity, enlarge the cell radius, reduce the number of MBTSs, and save the cost.

Description The TMA is used to amplify the uplink signals. It is an optional device for the antenna system. The TMA can compensate the feeder loss caused by long feeders. Therefore, the uplink sensitivity is increased and the uplink coverage capability is improved. Huawei MBTS supports the third-party TMA, including AISG TMA. The MBTS supplies power to and controls the TMA. Huawei MBTS can provide 10 V to 13 V output voltage to the TMA. When a major alarm related to the TMA is reported, the system automatically sets the attenuation value of the RX channel to 0. After the alarm is cleared, the system automatically sets the attenuation value of the RX channel to the configured value. In the case of the AISG TMA, the RET control signal, power, and RF signal are transmitted using the feeder cable. Therefore, operation and maintenance of the AISG TMA is easy. Smart bias tee (SBT) provides power supply to the TMA and the RET control signal to the RCU using the feeder cable. Huawei provides dual TMAs. Each TMA consists of two TX/RX branches, and only one TMA is required in each sector. Each TMA includes also a supervision and alarm unit in the low noise amplifier (LNA). The functions of both branches are the same and the function of one pair of branches is described as follows: The RX channel of each branch consists of two RX filters and an LNA. The LNA can be automatically bypassed when the DC is faulty. There is a bias tee in the BTS port of the TMA. For the SMART TMA, this bias tee is called the smart bias tee. Bias tee can separate the DC current from the RF signals and provide power supply to the LNA and the RET control signal to the RCU. The TX channel includes a TX filter.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


223


1 Basic Features

Huawei MBTS supports two kinds of TMA with the gain of 24 dB and 12 dB.

Enhancement 

GBSS6.1 Complies with the AISG1.1 protocol.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA



GBTS(GTMU) Hardware The DBS3900 (RRU3004) and BTS3900B/BTS3900E do not support this feature. The BTS3006C and BTS3002E require a DATM board. The BTS3012 and BTS3012AE require a DATU board. The BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L (DRFU) require a GATM board.






MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA




Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


224




1 Basic Features


1.13.2 MRFD-210602 Remote Electrical Tilt Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS7.0 and RAN5.0.

Summary The feature provides a solution to remote adjustment of the antenna tilt. The user can adjust the remote electrical tilt (RET) antenna tilt on the U2000 or LMT.


The RET antennas in multiple sites can be remotely adjusted. Therefore, the efficiency of adjusting the antenna tilt is improved and the cost of network optimization is reduced.



The adjustment of the RET antenna is not affected by the weather.



It is easy to adjust the RET antenna of a site that is difficult to reach.

Description The tilt of the RET antenna can be adjusted remotely. After an antenna is installed, the antenna tilt needs to be adjusted to optimize the network. The antenna tilt can be remotely adjusted through the electrical control. The phase shifter of the antenna can be controlled by the stepper motor outside the antenna. You can adjust the antenna tilt when the system is powered on and monitor the tilt in real time. Therefore, the precise remote adjustment of the antenna tilt can be achieved. The following figure shows the operating principle of the RET antenna.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


225


1 Basic Features

Figure 1.1 Working principle of the RET antenna

Remote Control Unit (RCU) is the driving motor of the phase shifter of the RET antenna. The RCU receives and executes the control commands from the MBTS to drive the stepper motor. A pulling bar connects the stepper motor and the phase shifter. When the stepper motor is triggered, the pulling bar moves and then the phase of the phase shifter changes through the gears. In this situation, the phase of each element of the array antenna changes regularly. Then, the direction of the main beam of the antenna changes accordingly. Therefore, the antenna tilt is adjusted. The MBTS supplies the DC power to the stepper motor and communicates with it on the AISG interface on the motor. In the Huawei RET solution, the RET antenna can be controlled remotely or locally by a command sent from the U2000 or LMT. The MBTS modulates that command to the On-Off-Keying (OOK) signals. The RF module transfers the DC power and the OOK signals to the STMA or the SBT using the feeder cables. The STMA or the SBT demodulates the OOK signals to RS485 signals and then sends the RS485 signals and part of the DC power to the RCU. No additional control cable is required. The Huawei RET solution supports the RET cascading control. Several cascading RET antennas can be controlled by the signals coming from the same control cable. The cascading solution helps save the cost of the SBTs.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


226


1 Basic Features

The Huawei RET solution supports the 2G/3G RET cascading control. The 3G RET antennas can be cascaded with the 2G RET antennas. At the OMC of the 2G RET antenna, you can control the tilt of the 3G RET antenna. Meanwhile, at the OMC of the 3G RET antenna, you can control the tilt of the 2G RET antenna. The cascading helps save the cost of SBTs and STMAs when the 2G and 3G RET antennas are installed in the same place.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


227


1 Basic Features

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA



GBTS(GTMU) Hardware The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature. The BTS3006C and BTS3002E require a DATM board. The BTS3012 and BTS3012AE require a DATU board. The BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L (DRFU) require a GATM board. The RU3922E does not support this feature.






MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.13.3 MRFD-210604 2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Summary This feature is a technique for improving the receive performance of the uplink channels.

Benefits This feature improves receiver sensitivity and uplink coverage, reducing the CAPEX.

Description With this feature, the same signal is received by two antennas. Then the two ways of signals on the two antennas are combined after being processed. Therefore, the signal attenuation is reduced. Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


228


1 Basic Features

This feature enhances the RX capability of uplink channels. Huawei MBTS supports both receive diversity and none receive diversity. With this feature, the MBTS does not require additional devices and algorithms. Compared with one-way none receive diversity, this feature requires twice the number of RX channels. In typical scenarios, the receiver sensitivity can be improved by 2 to 3 dB.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.14 Synchronization Mechanism 1.14.1 MRFD-210501 BTS/NodeB Clock Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Summary The synchronization of the MBTS clock provides the basis for the frame synchronization. The MBTS uses this feature to obtain the reference clock sources for the internal frame synchronization. The MBTS supports three clock synchronization modes: synchronization with the Iub/Abis clock, synchronization with the BITS clock, and synchronization with GPS

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


229


1 Basic Features

clock. In addition, the MBTS internal clock can work in free-run mode to temporarily provide reference source.

Benefits With this feature, the internal clock can be synchronized with the transmission network without using the auxiliary equipment, saving the cost. In addition, the precision of the synchronized clock meets the requirements of the radio transmission network and frequencies.

Description In compliance with the 3GPP specifications, the frequency stability of the master clock of the MBTS must be between -C0.05 ppm and +0.05 ppm. The MBTS can work in multiple clock synchronization modes to suit different clock topologies: 

Synchronization with the Iub/Abis clock (default mode) The clock source of the MBTS is synchronized with the line clock sources of its upperlevel NE such as the MBSC.



Synchronization with GPS The GPS card is optional unless the MBTS uses a GPS clock as its clock source. The clock signals are processed and synchronized as follows: The GPS antenna system receives GPS signals at 1575.42 MHz, and then transmits the signals to the GPS card. The system can trace up to eight (generally three or four) satellites simultaneously. The GPS card processes the signals and transmits them to the main clock module.



Synchronization with the BITS clock The MBTS can synchronize its clocks with the 2 MHz clock signals from an external reference clock. The reference clock can be a BITS clock or a 2 MHz clock from the transmission equipment. By performing phase locking and frequency dividing, the main clock module converts the clock signals into various clock signals required by the MBTS, for example, F_CLK, CLK_4X, and BFN.

In addition to the preceding three synchronization modes, the MBTS internal clock can work in free-run mode to keep the MBTS running. The enhanced stratum 3 OCXO with a high precision works as the master clock of the MBTS. The OCXO can guarantee the normal operation of the MBTS for up to 90 days.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA



GBTS(GTMU) Hardware The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3900B, and BTS3900E do not support GPS clock or BITS clock. BTS3012 and BTS3012AE require a DGPS board. BTS3900, BTS3900A,

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


230


1 Basic Features

BTS3900L, BTS3900AL, and DBS3900 require a USCU board to support the GPS clock or BITS clock. 

GBTS(UMPT) Hardware BTS3900, BTS3900A, BTS3900L, BTS3900AL, and DBS3900 require a USCU board to support the GPS clock or BITS clock.



MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.14.2 MRFD-210502 BSC/RNC Clock Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Summary With this feature, five types of clock sources are supported. Each clock source supports functions such as 1+1 backup, management of the clock source, query of the clock status, and maintenance of the link clock.

Benefits This feature provides various clock input schemes for operators. The clock source backup function prevents the primary clock faults from affecting services.

Description MBSC clock provides reliable clock sources for the MBSC to meet the requirements of the clock precision defined in the 3GPP specifications. Every type of clock source supports 1+1 backup. The MBSC clock subsystem consists of the clock processing board GCUa/GCGa and the clock processing unit in each subrack. The external reference clock signals are transmitted to the GCUa/GCGa. After a phase lock on the GCUa/GCGa, the clock signals are changed to 8 kHz clock signals. The signals are then transmitted to the SCUa in the same subrack through the backplane and to the SCUa in the EPS through clock signal cables. Then, the 8 kHz clock signals on the SCUa are transmitted to other boards in the same subrack through the backplane. When the clock source is faulty, the MBSC reports the related alarms and starts the 1+1 backup scheme to ensure the normal operation of the system. The MBSC clock sources are as follows: Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


231


1 Basic Features



Building integrated timing supply system (BITS)



Line clock extracted from the A/Iu or Abis/Iub interface



Global positioning system (GPS) satellite synchronization clock



8 kHz clock provided by an external device



Local oscillator clock

The MBSC provides the clock control setting functions, including management of the clock source, query of the clock status, and maintenance of the line clock. The MBSC requires only one clock source, and the clock source can work in automatic, manual, or self-oscillation mode. 

Automatic

In automatic mode, you do not need to specify a clock source for the current clock. The system automatically selects a clock source with the highest priority. 

Manual

In manual mode, you need to manually specify a clock source for the current clock. The system does not automatically switch to another clock source even if this clock source is faulty. 

Self-oscillation

The self-oscillation mode is the default clock working mode of the system.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware The GCGa board is required if the GPS satellite synchronization clock is used.



BSC6910 Hardware The GCGa board is required if the GPS satellite synchronization clock is used.









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


232


1 Basic Features

1.14.3 GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary The BTS supports the GPS synchronization through a satellite.


The frame synchronization on the Um interface in the entire network by using the GPS provides high synchronization precision and easy implementation.



When the network works in synchronous mode, the features such as ICC and IBCA can be used to increase the network capacity by more than 40%.



This feature improves the KPIs such as the MOS, paging success rate, handover success rate, call drop rate, and traffic volume.

Description In the existing GSM system, the BTSs work in asynchronous mode, resulting in timeslot overlapping. In the asynchronous network with the tight frequency reuse pattern, the overlapping of timeslots causes unnecessary and unpredictable interference because the frequency reuse distance between two cells using the same frequency is relatively short. The interference (that is, channel quality) rather than the number of channels restricts the network performance. Therefore, the BTSs in the entire network synchronize with each other based on the reference clock signals provided by the GPS satellite. The GPS clock system of the BTS receives the related information sent by the GPS satellite and then obtains the GPS absolute time and precise 1PPS pulse signals. The BTS clock circuit traces the 1PPS pulse signals to obtain the reference clock and then obtains various clock signals based on the reference clock. Each BTS in the network adjusts the frame number based on the absolute frame number calculated from the GPS absolute time received by the BTS software.

Enhancement Each BTS is equipped with a GPS for hardware synchronization of the entire network, which increases the costs. Therefore, the Soft-Synchronized Network feature, which is an optional feature, is introduced to GBSS8.0 to realize the frame synchronization on the Um interface through software. For details, see the GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network feature.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA



Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


233


1 Basic Features

The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3900B, and BTS3900E do not support this feature. The BTS3012 and BTS3012AE require a DGPS board. The DBS3900 and BTS3900 require a USCU board. 

GBTS(UMPT) Hardware The DBS3900 and BTS3900 require a USCU board.



MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.14.4 GBFD-118606 Clock Over IP Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary The Clock over IP feature provides high-precision clock synchronization for several BTSs in the GBSS IP network. Compared with the Global Positioning System (GPS) clock, Clock over IP is a cost-effective clock solution for BTS synchronization. The transmission cost is high because the IP timing packets are sent continuously. Huawei GBSS equipment allows operators to define the interval for sending IP timing packets, reducing the transmission bandwidth while ensuring the BTS clock synchronization.


Provides clock synchronization to guarantee the normal operation of the GSM system in the IP-based GSM network.



Significantly reduces the cost of network deployment compared with the GPS clock synchronization.

Description Clock over IP consists of the IP clock server and the IP clock client. The IP clock server extracts reference clock source from a clock device, such as a GPS or building integrated timing supply (BITS). Then, the IP clock server sends the clock synchronization information to the BTS by sending timing packets. As the IP clock client, the BTS performs the adaptation on the IP packets and obtains the clock synchronization information. Every IP timing packet occupies a certain bandwidth. Therefore, in the case of leased network or satellite transmission, the continuous transmission of IP timing packets increases the CAPEX and may even affect the ongoing services during peak hours. The GBSS allows Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


234


1 Basic Features

operators to define the interval for sending IP timing packets. In such a case, the IP timing packets can be sent only when the network load is light. The BTS clock provided by the GBSS can maintain a precision of 0.05 ppm within 90 days. Therefore, sending the IP timing packets regularly saves the bandwidth while ensuring the BTS clock synchronization. The application scenario of Clock over IP is shown in the following figure:

Enhancement 

GBSS8.1 Enhanced Clock over IP is available, which is used for the flexible configuration of clock synchronization mode.



GBSS9.0 The BTS supports primary and secondary IP clock servers. If the primary IP clock server becomes faulty, the path to extract clock signals is switched to the secondary IP clock server, enhancing the flexibility and reliability of the IP clock networking. The IP clock servers can be configured on the basis of BTSs.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA



GBTS(GTMU) Hardware An IP clock server is required. 3900 series base stations do not support Huawei proprietary protocols in GBSS9.0 that supports IEEE1588v2 standards. Active and standby clocks support IEEE1588v2 standards. BTS3012 series base stations support both Huawei proprietary protocols and IEEE1588v2 standards. The BTS3006C and BTS3002E do not support this feature. The GTMUa board does not support G.8265.1.



Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


235


1 Basic Features

GBTS(UMPT) does not support this feature. 

MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs An independent IP clock server is required.








1.15 Maintainability and Testing 1.15.1 GBFD-119301 Voice Fault Diagnosis Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS12.0.

Summary Software testing of BSC to determine whether there is one-way audio or cross-talk on the network. Creates a log of calls on which crosstalk occurs, and provides an alarm mechanism.

Benefits Alarms allow operators to quickly discover problems with voice quality on the network, and in conjunction with fault checks, assists with improving network quality. Creating a log of calls on which crosstalk occurs, which helps with problem diagnosis and improves efficiency in Operations and Maintenance.

Description Complaints may arise if problems such as one-way audio or crosstalk frequently occur. With this type of network problem, without a clear record of the times at which faults occurred, it can be very difficult to diagnose. This feature automatically conducts follow-up on a single call, determines whether one-way or cross talk has occurred. If the problem occurs, it will be recorded in the log: user ID, cell, affected carrier frequencies and channels. This gives maintenance personnel accurate data that they can use in problem diagnosis, without having to wait for the problem to reoccur. The anonymous IMSI and MSISDN will be recorded in the log. This alarm mechanism associated with this feature regularly collates the one-way radio and cross talk records for the BSC. If the frequency exceeds a certain threshold, it will make an alarm report. There is no need to wait for high levels of customer complaints: it is possible to discover network quality issues very early. Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


236


1 Basic Features

The cross talk test identifies voice coding in the following ways: FR, EFR, AMR_FR (excluding 12.2 kbit/s), AMR-HR (excluding 6.7 kbit/s and 7.4 kbit/s). The one-way test supports all voice coding types, but does not support tests of CSD services. Because of the testing mechanism used, this feature can detect cross talk and one-way problems caused by problems between the BTS and the A interface; but problems caused by errors between the Um interface and MSC cannot be detected. This feature is controlled with an on/off switch. When set to on, the function is effective, and it has no obvious impact on overall BSC performance. The cross talk tests are effective during TDM transmission; one-way tests are effective for both TDM and IP transmission.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA












MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA








−

GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch

−

GBFD-115701 TFO

−

GBFD-115702 TrFO

−

GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1

−


−


−

GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1 Aboved 8 features are matually exclusive with crosstalk detection.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

−


−

GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

237


−

1 Basic Features

Aboved 2 features are matually exclusive with one-way radio detection.

1.15.2 GBFD-119306 Abis Crossed Pair Diagnosis Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS13.0.

Summary Ability to test for crossed pairs at the connection to the Abis interface during TDM transmission.

Benefits Alarm for effective early warning of crossed pair issues, reducing subsequent user complaints.

Description Abis transmission crossed pair detection supports testing for problems with transmission to the Abis interface. When a transmission issue arises because of a connection error, this feature automatically detects the issue, designates the transmission as faulty, and assigns no further services to it. The principle behind Abis crossed pair testing is that a command link is assigned to every physical transmission, and command negotiations can be used to determine whether the transmission has a fault. This feature is therefore effective in detecting crossed pairs between different physical transmissions within a single BS. It can detect most crossed pair issues between transmissions from different BSs, but is ineffective in the following scenarios: when the configurations of the two BSs are identical, and the crossed pair arises between transmissions from the same port on the respective BSs. In this situation, even if there is an error with the physical connections from each BS, because the configurations are identical, the LAPD connections can all be established as normal.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware The BSC6900 supports this feature in TDM mode



BSC6910 Hardware The BSC6910 supports this feature in TDM mode.



GBTS(GTMU) Hardware The GBTS(GTMU) supports this feature in TDM mode.






MS NA



Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


238


1 Basic Features

NA 

Other NEs NA







1.15.3 GBFD-119307 Spectrum Scan Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS13.0.

Summary Using existing board configurations, the Spectrum Scan feature enables maintenance personnel to perform spectrum scan on the working frequencies on the uplink receive band over the Um interface.

Benefits This feature helps evaluate the interference to working frequencies, facilitating routine network optimization and interference detection.

Description With this feature, Huawei GBSS performs a long-period spectrum scan on working frequencies. This helps evaluate the interference to the working frequencies and resolve interference issues. With this feature, all working frequencies for a single timeslot of a single carrier are scanned for a maximum of 48 hours. Scanning results are then sent to the LMT and saved so that users learn about the uplink interference strength of the working frequencies in a cell. During a spectrum scan, only the specified timeslot is out of service, and the cell capacity is not affected.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA



GBTS(GTMU) Hardware The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature. Non-optimized DTRU and QTRU do not support this feature. Optimized DTRU does not support frequency time domain scan.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


239




1 Basic Features




MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.15.4 GBFD-119308 Intermodulation Testing Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS13.0.

Summary Based on the existing frequency and power configurations for a cell, the Intermodulation Testing feature helps detect the interference to working frequencies caused by intermodulation products of the antenna system.

Benefits During routine operation and maintenance (O&M), O&M personnel often need to perform passive intermodulation (PIM) testing on all sites. The testing efficiency is low without the Intermodulation Testing feature. The reason is as follows: The BTS sends dummy bursts to each cell when the BTS is idle and when the BTS transmits signals at full power; then, the O&M personnel have to compare interference band-related counters for the two periods for each cell. With this feature, O&M personnel simply run a command to start testing, and the test results are automatically displayed on the LMT. This improves operational efficiency, for example, the testing on a single site takes only a few minutes.

Description Besides the voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR), intermodulation products generated by the antenna system also affect the uplink receive quality if the intermodulation products fall within the receive frequency band. Based on the existing frequency and power configurations for a cell, online PIM testing automatically and quickly measures the intermodulation products that fall within the receive frequency band and then determines whether the cell is experiencing intermodulation interference according to the PIM testing threshold specified by users.



240


1 Basic Features

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA



GBTS(GTMU) Hardware The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature. Non-optimized DTRU and QTRU do not support this feature. Optimized DTRU does not support offline intermodulation testing.






MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







1.15.5 GBFD-118607 IP Performance Monitor Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS8.1.

Summary IP performance monitor (PM) checks the performance of transmission between the BSC and a BTS in an IP network. By effectively monitoring the changes in QoS-related parameters, IP PM quickly checks the QoS of an IP bearer network over the Abis interface online. The check results serve as a basis for flow control and admission control.

Benefits This feature provides the following functions: 

Reports alarms when the packet loss rate for online services exceeds a specified threshold. For example, an alarm is reported when the transmission quality of the IP bearer network deteriorates.



Performs real-time performance monitoring and traffic measurement. This reduces maintenance costs by letting operators know the transmission network quality in real time and locate and isolate transmission problems such as unstable transmission rates.



Monitors the bandwidth change for an IP bearer network online, which provides a reference for dynamic bandwidth adjustment over the Abis interface.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


241


1 Basic Features

Description IP PM is a Huawei proprietary protocol and requires support from the BSC and BTS. When IP transmission is used between the BSC and a BTS, IP PM can be used to check the end-to-end transmission quality. The IP PM protocol defines Forward Monitoring (FM) and Backward Reporting (BR) measurement frames. After IP PM is enabled, the local end (BSC or BTS) periodically sends FM frames and the peer end (BTS or BSC) responds with BR frames. An FM frame contains the number of service packets/bytes transmitted in a measurement period and the sending time. After receiving the FM frames, the peer end adds the receiving time and the number of service packets/bytes received in the current measurement period to the BR frames and then sends the BR frames containing the sending time. Figure 1-5 shows the IP PM procedure. Figure 1.1 IP PM procedure

After being calculated by using the following methods, the information contained in the FM and BR frames indicates the QoS change for an IP bearer network. The packet loss rate in the current measurement period can be calculated by using the following formula: Packet loss rate = (Number of transmitted packets in FM frames - Number of received packets in BR frames)/Number of transmitted packets in FM frames The loopback delay and transmission jitter can be calculated based on the sending time and receiving time recorded in the FM and BR frames. IP PM can monitor an IP link or certain types of services such as EDGE services and CS services in real time. The monitoring results provide a reference for determining the fault location. By monitoring a measured IP link between the BSC and a BTS in real time, IP PM calculates the delay, jitter, and packet loss rate for the IP link, providing a basis for flow control and admission control. When the delay jitter or packet loss rate on the measured link increases, the traffic on the logical port where the link is configured is adjusted to reduce the link load and relieve the link congestion.

Enhancement 

GBSS14.0 Enhanced IP PM can accurately collect statistics on IP packets. In addition, collecting statistics on IP packets is performed at the IP layer, helping provide accurate statistical results when an IP packet is divided into two packets. IP PM can be enabled when IP over E1/T1 mode is used on the BTS side.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


242


1 Basic Features

The alarm mechanism is improved and now has an appropriate alarm threshold, provides detailed IP PM activation failure causes and measurement failure causes, and provides related operations. The GUI is optimized. The parameters related to real-time performance monitoring and traffic measurement are optimized, improving user experience.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware One of the following IP Interface boards is required over the Abis interface: FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc/FG2d/GOUd



BSC6910 Hardware One of the following IP Interface boards is required over the Abis interface: FG2c/GOUc/FG2d/GOUd



GBTS(GTMU) Hardware The BTS3006C and BTS3002E do not support this feature. The UTRPc and GTMUb boards support IP PM enhanced in GBSS14.0. The GTMUa, BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3900B, and BTS3900E do not support IP PM enhanced in GBSS14.0 but support traffic statistics and packet loss alarm reporting.






MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA








1.15.6 GBFD-118614 GSM PS Service Map Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS14.0.

Summary This feature enables the BSC to record PS service information, including service type, terminal type, and measurement reports. Based on the service information, the Nastar presents grid-based geographical PS service traffic distribution by terminal type or service type.

Benefits By using a visualization tool, this feature helps mobile network operators identify the resource distribution and bottlenecks of the entire network. This feature also helps operators deal with a flood of data and guides hot spot coverage planning and network capacity expansion. Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


243


1 Basic Features

Description By using the Nastar based on the Geographic Information System (GIS), this feature provides the following functions: 

Displaying PS traffic volume by service type

The BSC identifies the types of terminals used such as dual-mode MSs or data cards and records service information. Based on the service information, the Nastar calculates total PS traffic volume on a per-grid basis and displays the traffic volume by terminal type. If the traffic volume of dual-mode MSs or data cards is too large in certain grids, interoperability parameters can be modified to balance the system load. This helps improve service quality and increases resource usage. 

Providing accurate WLAN deployment

The BSC identifies the IDs of terminals processing PS services and records service information. Based on the service information and terminal IDs, the Nastar determines terminal types, for example, Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) capable terminals and data cards. In addition, the Nastar calculates total PS traffic volume on a per-grid basis and displays the traffic volume by terminal type. If the total traffic volume of Wi-Fi-capable terminals is too large in certain grids, wireless local area networks (WLANs) can be deployed in these hot spots.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS The MS must support NC1 or NC2.






Other NEs The Nastar must support this feature.






GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS


Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


244


1 Basic Features

1.15.7 GBFD-115402 LCS (Cell ID + TA) Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary The built-in SMLC supports the Cell ID+TA location service. In addition, the MS location information can be directly displayed on the BSC LMT.


Locates MSs.



Increases operators' revenues by providing weather forecasts, trip scheduling, emergency assistance, stock information, business planning, and transportation information.



Improves the efficiency for handling problems, such as emergencies, disaster relief, routine network optimization, customers' complaints by providing location information.

Description LCS is a series of services that are achieved based on locating MSs in a certain range, such as locating an emergency call or MSs for value-added services (VAS). LCS must meet the specified QoS, such as the required accuracy and latency. Huawei supports the Cell ID+TA positioning scheme based on the BSS and NSS. The positioning precision of this scheme is about 500 meters.

Enhancement 

GBSS7.0 Huawei BSS supports the simplified LCS on the basis of the NSS-based LCS and BSSbased LCS. The BSC analyzes the MS location information and sends the information to the BSC LMT. The cell global identification (CGI), timing advance (TA), longitude and latitude of a cell, azimuth, and error are provided in the MS tracing results.

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


245


1 Basic Features

The CN must support this feature. 

Other NEs NA







1.15.8 GBFD-118630 Ethernet OAM Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS9.0.

Summary The GBSS supports two types of Ethernet OAM: point-to-point Ethernet OAM (802.3ah) and end-to-end Ethernet OAM (802.1ag). The functions of Ethernet OAM consist of fault detection, monitoring, verification, and identification. Through these functions, this feature achieves reliability and high availability of Ethernet services.

Benefits The Ethernet OAM helps the operator to manage user access in terms of detection, monitoring, and rectification of Ethernet faults. This feature achieves reliability and high availability of Ethernet services, enables the service provider to provide economical and efficient advanced Ethernet services, and ensures that the services have high quality and reliability that are required by telecommunications services. This feature is implemented at the GBSS equipment, minimizing the impact of Ethernet bandwidth fluctuation or faults on the GBSS.

Description With the introduction of IP GSM, the Ethernet as a type of transport bearer is widely used. As a Layer 2 protocol, Ethernet OAM can report the status of the network at the data link layer. Therefore, the network is monitored and managed more effectively. The functions of Ethernet OAM consist of fault detection, monitoring, verification, and identification. The faults involve the hardware faults that can be detected by the physical layer, such as link failure, and the software faults that cannot be detected by the physical layer, such as memory bridging unit damage. Ethernet OAM plays a significant role in reducing CAPEX/OPEX and complying with the Service Level Agreement (SLA). The GBSS supports two types of Ethernet OAM: point-to-point Ethernet OAM (802.3ah) and end-to-end Ethernet OAM (802.1ag). 1. Point-to-point Ethernet OAM The point-to-point Ethernet OAM complies with IEEE 802.3ah. The point-to-point Ethernet OAM concerns the OAM of the last mile rather than the specific services. The OAM implements point-to-point maintenance of the Ethernet using mechanisms such as OAM discovery, loopback, link monitoring, and fault detection.

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


246


1 Basic Features

2. End-to-end Ethernet OAM The end-to-end Ethernet OAM complies with IEEE 802.1ag. Regarding the OAM domain as a whole, the end-to-end Ethernet OAM establishes end-to-end detection to perform maintenance of the Ethernet based on the services. When the BSC detects Ethernet faults or degraded network performance through the Ethernet OAM, the BSC, based on the practical configuration, can perform operations such as route reselection, port switchover, and board switchover to ensure proper communication on the Ethernet.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware The Abis, A, and Gb interfaces require IP Interface boards.



BSC6910 Hardware The Abis, A, and Gb interfaces require IP Interface boards.



GBTS(GTMU) Hardware Need GTMUb or UTRP to support.






MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs The Ethernet OAM protocol should be supported by the interconnected transmission equipment.





Issue 04 (2015-03-04)



−


−

GBFD-118603 Gb over IP

Mutually Exclusive Features Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

247


1 Basic Features

NA

1.15.9 GBFD-116401 End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary This feature enables you to collect the information about the specified MS if required and then collect the traced faults in a specific network element using only a few system resources. In this manner, you can rectify the faults effectively.

Benefits It is difficult to locate the service faults in MSs because the communications network becomes increasingly complicated. You can detect the section where the fault occurs only when the information about the whole process of one MS is collected. By using the end-toend MS signaling tracing feature, you can completely record the service activities of an MS and then locate the section where the fault occurs. The recorded information covers all the network elements involved in the service of the MS. If the traced MS is properly defined, the valid location information can be obtained without using a large amount of processing and transmission resources of the system in the whole tracing process.

Description With this feature, you can create or delete a tracing task in the HLR. The HLR sends the tracing activation message to the MSC/VLR where the MS is located. When the traced MS initiates services, the MSC notifies the BSC to perform tracing. When the MS is switched over to a new MSC, location update is initiated. Then the HLR sends a tracing activation message to the new MSC/VLR and the tracing task of the original MSC is complete. When receiving the message of starting a tracing task from the MSC, the BSC traces information about all the interfaces and then saves the information to the BAM. The information is saved as a .tmf file, which is used for interface tracing on the BSC LMT. The file can be browsed using the function of interface tracing review on the BSC LMT. When browsing the information about a traced MS, you can choose a time segment and choose the message field to be viewed in a message filter window. The BSC supports a maximum of 64 tracing tasks (including single-MS signaling tracing, interface signaling tracing, and end-to-end MS signaling tracing tasks). There should be at least 16 end-to-end MS signaling tracing tasks. If the number of existing end-to-end MS signaling tracing tasks reaches or exceeds 16, determine whether the total number of tasks reaches the upper threshold when creating an end-to-end MS signaling tracing task. If the total number does not reach the upper threshold, you can create more tasks. If the total number reaches the upper threshold, task creation fails.

Enhancement None

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


248


1 Basic Features

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA










WOFD-190600 GBSS Enhanced Subscriber Tracing

−

WOFD-191400 G&U CS Subscriber Tracing Aboved features on the U2000 are required.




1.16 Documentation 1.16.1 MRFD-210701 Documentation Availability This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN6.0.

Summary The feature describes the available documentation of the products.

Benefits With this feature, the operators can obtain the product information and can perform maintenance operations accordingly.

Description The customer documentation includes the following documents: 

MBSC documents



NodeB documents

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


249




1 Basic Features

BTS documents

The documentation covers the hardware description, installation, commissioning, operation, and maintenance of the MBSC and MBTS. The following table describes the documents: Document Category

Description

Product Description

Describes the architecture, hardware configuration, operation and maintenance, and technical specifications of the product.

Hardware Description

Describes the hardware of NEs, such as the cabinet, board, and cable.

Installation Guide

Describes the procedures for installing the cabinet, boards, and cables.

Initial Configuration Guide

Describes how to perform the initial configuration of NEs.

Commissioning Guide

Describes how to commission the NE to ensure that the new NE can gain access to the BSS/RAN system.

LMT User Guide

Describes the GUI, functions, and operations of the LMT.

Site Maintenance Guide

Describes the hardware maintenance items and the component replacement procedures

Routine Maintenance Guide

Describes the routine maintenance methods of the MBSC and MBTS.

Reconfiguration Guide

Describes the common tasks and methods of data reconfiguration of the MBSC and MBTS.

Reference

The reference documents are as follows: 

MML command reference: describes the information about meanings, recommended values, and default values of the parameters of each command.



Alarm reference: describes the information about meanings of the alarms and how to clear them.



Performance counter reference: describes the information about meanings and measurement points of each counter.

The documents have the following characteristics: 

Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Topic-oriented: Based on the DITA technology, the information is provided under separate topics. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

250




1 Basic Features

Powerful advanced search: The information can be searched according to products or data types.

Enhancement None

Dependency 

BSC6900 Hardware NA



BSC6910 Hardware NA









MS NA



CN NA



Other NEs NA







Issue 04 (2015-03-04)


251

260151866-GBSS16-0-Basic-Feature-Description.pdf

Recommend Documents